Home

T-Mobile SGH-T989 Samsung Galaxy S II User Manual

1. 243 Sound Settings 247 Display Settings 249 Power Saving Mode 251 SD Card amp Device Storage 252 Battery Usage 252 nae Ree ae 252 Accounts and Synchronization 255 Location Services 257 257 Language and Input Settings 262 Back up and 267 Dock Settings 269 Date and Time 270 Accessibility Settings 270 Motion Settings 271 Developer Options 272 Google Search Settings 273 About Phone 274 Section 13 Health and Safety Information i co crines 276 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 276 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 281 FCC Part 15 Information to User 282 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 283 Smart Practices While Driving 283 Battery Use and Safety 284 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 286 UL Certified Travel Charger 287 Display Touch Screen 288 GPS amp 5 288 Emergency Calls 289 Care and Maintenance
2. 290 Responsible Listening 291 Operating Environment 293 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices 295 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device 297 FCC Notice and Cautions 297 Other Important Safety Information 298 Section 14 Warranty Information 300 Standard Limited Warranty 300 End User License Agreement for Software 305 Social Hub 310 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 315 Social Hub Privacy Policy 318 INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT 318 USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT 319 DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THIRD PARTIES ems 320 CHILDREN Bie ttt tonne teta 321 SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT 321 CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC AREAS 321 CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES 322 ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT 322 CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY 323 Social Hub End User License Agreement 323 WING OX 328 Section 1 Getting Started This section explains how to get started with your device by installing and charging the battery installing the SIM card and optional memory card and setting up your voice mail Before using your phone for the first time you ll need to install and charge the battery a
3. 24 1 Features of Your Device 26 FROME VIQW sue cere roto t esee ees 27 BackView cece eee ses 29 Device Display 30 Status Bal seeded REY 30 Function KEYS sess nose cer heroes 36 Home 37 Applications 39 Screen Navigation 50 Using Gestures 53 Menu Navigation 54 Customizing the Screens 56 Section 3 Memory Card 63 Using the SD Card eee 63 SD card Overview 63 Section 4 Call Functions and Cofitacts List nee 66 Displaying Your Phone Number 66 Making 66 Ending a Call 67 Making Emergency Calls 68 Dialing Options 69 Answering a Call 70 Managing Reject Calls 71 Using Voice Command 72 Using Voice Talk 73 International Calls 73 Pause Dialing 74 Wait DIANO i icc RR 74 Redialing the Last Number 74 Speed Dialing 75 Wi Fi Calling 76 In Call Options 79 Call Logi Tab sie ei oe ek as 83
4. 161 Deleting Messages 125 Play 5 161 Message Search 126 Music Player 166 Messaging Settings 126 Using Playlists 167 Text Templates 129 Creating a Playlist 167 Email seme 129 Transferring Music Files 169 Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook 133 Removing Music Files 169 Using Google Mail 138 AllShara adage homie 169 Google Talk 140 T Mobile TV 171 Using Instant Messaging IM 141 YouTube 171 Google isse xt nm s 141 Section 9 Applications and Messenger 142 Development nnns 172 Section 8 Multimedia 143 Applications 172 Assigning the Default Storage Location 143 411 amp MOIG noh lp b PR ELDER 172 Using the Camera 144 DX mp EE 173 Camera Options 145 Asphalt eae 173 Using the 151 Blio eBooks T Mobile 173 Photo Editor 154 Galculator tet Rh RE EAS 174 3 Calendar saci sie dud dues Bek Reate kd ec hd 174 Cam
5. Play Movies list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list For more information refer to Play Movies on page 161 Play Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Play Store The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download m From the Home screen tap ka Applications gt Gp Musio For more information refer to Play Music on page 161 Play Store Formerly known as the Android Market this application provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your phone The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account Accessing the Play Store 1 Pom the Home screen tap La Applications gt gt p Play Store 2 If not already logged in with your Google account tap Next 3 Sign and enter your Google account information 4 Tap Accept to agree to the Play Store terms of service For more information refer to Downloading a New Google Application on page 194 Downloading a New Google Application To download a new application you will need to use your Google account to sign in to the Play Store The home page provides several ways to find applications The h
6. an icon to open the recent application Customizing the Screens You can customize the Home screens panels to display the Widgets Shortcuts Folders or Wallpapers For example one screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media while another screen might contain communication apps such as Gmail You can customize your Home screen by doing the following Adding Deleting and Rearranging screens Assigning a New Home screen Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts Sharing Application Information Managing Shortcuts Adding and Removing Widgets Creating and Managing Folders Changing the Background Wallpapers Understanding Your Device 56 Adding and Deleting Screens Your phone comes with seven screens You can delete these screens and then add them back later Note These screens can be deleted and re arranged Important Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least one screen To delete a screen 1 Press gt and then tap Edit 2 Touch and hold then drag the undesired screen down to the Remove tab 3 Press to return to the main Home screen To add a screen 1 Press 2 iE and then tap Edit 57 2 Tap Add screen The newly added screen appears as the last page 3 Press to return to the main Home screen Rearranging the Screens 1 Press gt and then tap Edit 2 Touch and hold a scree
7. Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your device Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery Turn off Automatic application sync Use the Power Savings Widget to deactivate hardware functions such as Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS Synchronization or LCD brightness setting Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions have been consuming your battery resources Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications Use the Task Manager feature to end shutdown background applications that are still running These minimized applications can over time cause your device to slow down Turn off any streaming services after use see Running Services Getting Started 16 Animated wallpapers use processing power memory and more power Change your Live Wallpaper to a non animated Wallpaper gallery or Gallery image Power Savings Active applications Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS Synchronization Location consent or the LCD Brightness functionality all act to drain your battery The Power Savings application was designed to quickly activate turn on or deactivate turn off those functions or applications that use the most battery power 1 Note 17 From the Home screen touch and hold an empty area until the Add to Home menu displays Tap Widgets gt Power savings The Power
8. 12 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen Important Selecting Close only closes the current description scree and does not disable data collection To disable data collection go to Settings gt Back up and reset gt Collect diagnostics and turn off the Allow Diagnostics feature For more information refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 269 Note Enabling Google location services can drain battery power For more information refer to Power Savings on page 17 Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location Although the device is configured to store new pictures and videos to locations such as Phone it is a very good idea to confirm which location is being used before using your device Important Too many users can overlook this storage destination until something goes wrong It is recommended that you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features 1 From the Home screen tap e Camera 2 From the viewfinder screen tap Settings and Scroll down to the Storage entry Getting Started 18 3 this entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos Choose from Phone or Memory card Note It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card 4 Press Fay to return to the Home screen Switching the Device On or Off Once the device
9. Google Account dashboard allows you to manage your collected data via your Google account 3 Press to return to the previous screen Configuring Text to speech This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of on screen data such as messages and incoming caller information This action is called TTS Text To Speech 1 Press 3 and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Text to speech output 2 Select a current Preferred TTS engine from the list of available options The default is Google Text to speech 3 Tap E to configure the engine s settings 4 Configure the General options to alter the settings associated with this feature Speech rate adjusts the rate at which on screen text is Spoken by the device Choose from Very slow Slow Normal Fast and Very fast 267 Listen to an example plays a short example of what the text to speech feature sounds like on your device when activated Driving mode incoming calls and new notifications are automatically ready out loud Driving mode settings selects those applications that will use TTS while driving mode is activated Choose from Incoming call Message New emails New voicemail Alarm Schedule or Unlock screen Configuring the Mouse TrackPad This feature allows you to configure the pointer speed for the mouse trackpad 1 Press and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Pointer speed 2 Adjust the slider and tap OK B
10. e From the Home screen tap ty gt m Gmail From the Gmail Inbox tap MZ Compose at the bottom of the screen to create a new message Enter the recipients Email address in the To field Tip Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a 139 comma 7 Press and select Add Cc Bcc to add a carbon or blind copy Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your message Once complete tap Send Viewing a Gmail Message 1 From the Gmail Inbox tap a message to view the following options located at the bottom of the screen Archive archives the selected Email Delete a deletes the currently selected Email Labels 2 assigns label to the current Email e Mark as Unread 584 tags the current message as unread and returns you to the Google Mail Inbox Newer swiping to the right displays newer Emails Older swiping to the left displays older Emails Press gx to select one of the following additional options Change labels changes the label on the email or conversation Mark important assigns the current email an important status Mute mutes the conversation Report spam reports the Email message as spam Settings allows you to configure the General or Notification Settings Help launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help information Send feedback sends feedback to Google Creati
11. 3 Select a language by tapping at the bottom of the Listening area Tap Add more languages to assign a new language via the Google voice typing menu 4 Removing the check mark from the Automatic field allows you to select additional languages 5 Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of known offensive words or language A green check mark indicates the feature is active Assign the Voice Recognition Service 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Voice recognition 2 Select an available option Google is the default service Configuring Voice Input Recognition This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal input 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Voice recognition gt Voice Search 2 Configure the available options to alter the settings associated with this feature Language selects an input language and associated dialect recognition if available SafeSearch sets the explicit image filter settings These Settings apply to only Google voice search results Choose from Off Moderate or Strict Block offensive words allows you to block recognition of known offensive words or language A green check mark indicates the feature is active Changing Your Settings 266 Personalized recognition allows you to improve speech recognition and accuracy by allowing Google to associate your recordings with your Google Account
12. 71 To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts 1 From the Home screen tap B Contacts 2 Locate an entry and tap it to open the Contact Overview Screen page 108 3 Press and then tap Add to reject list All phone numbers associated with this entry are then added to the reject list To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list 1 3 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Call gt Call rejection gt Auto reject list Tap Add and either enter the phone number or select a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list Tap Save to complete the assignment Using Voice Command This application allows you to use your voice to perform operations that you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number texting a message playing music etc 1 2 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Utility gt LOS Voice command Read the Samsung Disclaimer and tap Confirm to continue Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to continue Read the information on the How to use Samsung voice screen then tap Confirm 5 Read the information on the What can say screen then tap Finish 6 Atthe Voice talk screen scroll across the screen to view some of the sample icons for assistance in using Voice command or Tap Tap amp Speak to say what you would like to do 7 Follow the on screen instructions Call Functions and Contacts List 7
13. Help Displays application help information Applications Multimedia 162 Listening to Music You can listen to music by using your device s built in speakers through a wired headset or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo headset Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate on screen volume control then touch and drag on the scale to set volume Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Qv Play Music 2 Tapa song in your library to listen to it or While viewing a list of songs tap Options next to a song and tap Play or While viewing a list of albums artists playlists or genres tap Options adjacent to the label and tap Play 163 The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts to play The tracks in the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list unless you choose a repeat option Otherwise playback stops only if you Stop it even when you switch applications Note If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the Music application the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the screen Displaying the Now Playing Screen If you navigate away from the Now playing screen to return to the Now playing screen from other Music screens m Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar or In a single motion touch and drag Music Options While Playing a Song no
14. use of the Wi Fi Calling feature Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range Wi Fi Only Wi Fi network is required for making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range Cellular Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls 6 Tap OK to save the setting 7 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt More Tap Wi Fi Calling to toggle off the feature then tap it again to reactivate the feature and re register your device with the T Mobile Network 8 Confirm Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar Launching Wi Fi Calling Note Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar 2 Confirm lt Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar When Action Then Displays on the screen status bar Youare connectedto the T Mobile networkand can make Wi Fi calls Displays on the screen status bar The Wi Fi calling feature is active and in use within an active call Does not display on the screen status bar You are charged normal calling rate minutes For more information refer to Activating Wi Fi Calling on page 77 Displays on the screen status bar There is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature 3 U
15. Contacts to display allows you to choose to only display contacts that have phone numbers sort by first or last name display contacts first name first or last name first display contacts stored to your SIM card display contacts stored on your phone and or display contacts stored to other accounts Settings allows you to configure where you save new contacts to or view your service numbers or send contact information Options include Only contacts with phones List by Display contacts by Service numbers and Send contact Contact Menu Options 1 2 107 From the Home screen tap Touch hold an entry to reveal the context menu The following options display Edit allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry Delete allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry Join contact allows you to link the current contact to another current contact Similar to a see also feature If you can t remember a contact s information linking entries can help you find the person you are looking for Share contact information allows you to send the current entry info via text message Add to favorites allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to the list within the Favorites tab Remove from favorites allows you to remove the current Contacts entry from the Favorites tab Add to group allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an existing grou
16. For more information refer to Files on page 155 177 Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message m From the Home screen tap ta Applications gt 4 Gallery For more information refer to The Gallery on page 156 Gmail Google Mail Gmail is a web based email service Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone Depending on your synchronization settings Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail account on the web m From the Home screen tap Applications gt m Gmail For more information refer to Using Google Mail on page 138 Google Google makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 20 La gt Q Google For more information refer to Google on page 141 IM Instant Messaging allows you to send and receive instant messages using Windows Live Messenger Google Talk or Yahoo Messenger communities m From the Home screen tap Ld Applications gt IN For more information refer to Using Instant Messaging IM on page 141 Kies air Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network You can view
17. MOBI KIDS MOBI KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people This is an international multi center study involving 14 European and non European countries Additional information about MOBI KIDS can be found at http www creal cat programes recerca en_projectes creal view php ID 39 Surveillance Epidemiology and End Results SEER Program of the National Cancer Institute The National Cancer Institute NCI actively follows cancer statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer rates should go up because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U S Between 1987 and 2005 the overall age adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase Additional information about SEER can be found at http seer cancer gov Cell Phone Industry Actions Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps including the following Support needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user and Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current informatio
18. More provides you with the additional options such as Copy allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different folder Print allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung printer Edit launches the photo editor application For more information refer to Photo Editor on 192 Crop provides an on screen box that allows you to crop the t current picture Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or tap Discard to ignore any changes Motion launches the Motion settings page For more information refer to Motion Settings on page 271 Rotate left allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a counterclockwise direction Rotate right allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a clockwise direction Slideshow adds the selected photo to a custom slideshow Rename allows you to rename the current file Send to allows you to send the file to a Contacts entry New Email address or New Phone number Set default destination allows you to assign a default action to take after taking an image Contacts New Email address or New phone number The default storage location for pictures is DCIM gt Camera folder Details files details such as Title Type Date taken Album Location Latitude Longitude etc Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo 1 From the Home screen tap Application
19. Off Wi Fi to disable Wi Fi when it is not connected to an AP Turn Off Bluetooth to disable Bluetooth when not in use or actively transmitting data Turn Off GPS to disable the GPS location system when not in use Turn off Sync to disable the feature when the phone is not synchronizing with the server Brightness to activate deactivate the Brightness adjustment eature Once enable the following Brightness adjustment field is accessible Brightness to adjust the brightness of the screen For more information refer to Adjusting Screen Brightness on page 250 Screen timeout to adjust the time delay before the screen urs off 4 Tap OK to store the new settings SD Card amp Device Storage From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card see Using the SD Card on page 63 To view the memory allocation for your external SD card Press CN and then tap Settings gt Storage The available memory displays under the Total space and Available space headings Battery Usage This option allows you to view a list of those components using battery power 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Battery 2 From the upper right tap Refresh to update the list t Tap an entry to view more detailed information Applications This device can be used for Android development You can writ
20. Section 5 Entering Text 87 Text Input Methods 87 Selecting the Text Input Method 87 Entering Text Using Swype 88 Using the Samsung Keypad 93 Using XT9 Predictive Text 96 Using the Google Voice Typing 98 Section 6 Contacts 100 Accounts tae ee 100 Contacts List 101 Finding a Contact 104 Contact List Options 106 Contact Menu Options 107 Contact Entry Options 108 Joining Contact Information 108 Sending Namecard 111 Copying Contact Information 112 Synchronizing Contacts 113 Display Options 114 Adding more Contacts via Accounts and accuse de dor reca nter 114 Additional Contact Options 116 GOUD S Lebe ete be mer bir mide 117 The Favorites 118 Section 7 Messages 119 BRIGG SER 155 Types of Messages 119 The Gallery 156 Creating and Sending Messages 120 Using the Video 156 Message Options 121 Media NuD 158 Viewing Newly Received Messages 123 Play Movies
21. Talk Launches a Web based Google Talk application that lets you chat and video conference with family and friends over the Internet for free For more information refer to Google Talk on page 140 Task Found within the Utility application allows you to keep track of both your current and upcoming tasks You can also sync these tasks with different accounts For more information refer to Task on page 199 Understanding Your Device 48 49 Task manager Use Task Manager to see which applications are running on your phone and to end running applications to extend battery life For more information refer to Task Manager on page 200 TeleNav GPS This driving aid provides both audible and visual navigation instructions for GPS navigation For more information refer to TeleNav GPS on page 201 Utility This application houses some of the most commonly used utility applications such as Calculator Memo Mini diary Task Voice command and Voice recorder For more information refer to Utility on page 201 Video player Launches your device s built in video application that plays video files stored on your microSD card For more information referto Using the Video Player on page 156 Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological or
22. Tap OK Register Your DivX Device for VOD Playback of Purchased Movies To play purchased DivX movies on your device you will first need to complete a one time registration using both your device and your computer 1 2 157 Write down the DivX registration code that appears on screen Copy this 8 or 10 digit number down Verify you have the latest DivX software running on your computer Download the free player for your computer from www divx com Open the DivX Player on your computer and from within the VOD menu select Register a DivX Certified Device You are prompted to log in or create a DivX account if your account information has not already been saved in DivX Player Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the registration code from step 2 and create a device nickname ex Pat or Pat s Device Select a location on your computer to download the DivX registration video with the same title os eat nad ply year wen ie yuu ret on loy phased POD come hesskalbniadu Pre Hageatca iode atypical bitadi vea devia rara Y on are iridis to cate Fw cade cansa L6 Ca Dd e Fonte D S some Fer pour deco en om aunty recogen t NIK SON Uv POOR YO Pe e as your device nickname ex Pat divx Follow the on screen instructions to download the file and initiate the transfer process You will need to place this video file onto your
23. The previous In call number turns gray and displays On hold The new active call displays a green background behind the number Turning the Speakerphone on and off While on a call you can use your Speakerphone by following these steps 1 Tap Speaker off to toggle the speakerphone on 2 Tap Speaker on to toggle the speakerphone off Tip When the speaker is turned On the color of the speaker is green When the speaker is turned Off the color of the speaker is gray Muting a Call 1 Tap Mute off to turn mute on so the other caller cannot hear you speaking 2 Tap Mute on to turn mute off and resume your conversation Switching to Bluetooth Headset 1 Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call 2 While on a call switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of speaker by tapping Headset 3 At the prompt tap Turn to enable Bluetooth if it is not already activated More In call Options During a call you can save the current caller s information to the Contacts list or create a Memo Viewing the Contacts List During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list 1 Press and then tap Contacts 2 Browse the Contacts list for the information you need 3 Press to return to the active call Call Functions and Contacts List 80 Creating a Memo During a Call During a call it may be necessary to record information a Note 1 Press and then tap Memo 2 Use the keyboard to enter the note then ta
24. including both radio waves and microwaves are not great enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules Therefore RF energy is a type of non ionizing radiation Other types of non ionizing radiation include visible light infrared radiation heat and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies While RF energy does not ionize particles large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage Two areas of the body the eyes and the testes are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat Research Results to Date Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems The results of most studies conducted to date say no In addition attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency RF from cell phones and adverse health outcomes Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge Some of these studies are described below 277 Interphone Study Interphone is a large international study designed to determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology June 2010 compared cell phone usage fo
25. 3 Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK 4 With security enabled enter a new password into the Password field Important The more complex the password the harder it will be for intruders to break your security It is recommended that you not use names birthdays or other personal information 5 Tap Save to store the new settings Connections 226 Section 11 Time Management This section describes how you can manage time using time related applications such as the Calendar Alarm Clock Analog or Digital clock and the World clock Calendar With the Calendar feature you can consult the calendar by day week or month create events and set an alarm to act as a reminder 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt vn Calendar The Calendar displays four tabs Month displays the Month view Week displays the Week view Day displays the Day view e List allows you to search for events for the selected Month Week or Day or you can look for events for a future date 2 Press gx and select one of the following options Create event creates a new Event Go to displays a specific date Today displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting the date 227 Search allows you to search within your current events Delete allows you to delete All events All events before today or an individual event Settings displays a list of configurable settings Creating a Cal
26. CAPS ALT M key as d f h jfk 1 Note After typing an initial uppercase character the 8 key mum de Delete changes to and all letters that follow are in lower Case io SWYPE Settings 3 Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form Text Input mode Voice actions pey 9 y a word f you make a mistake tap 1o erase a single character Touch and hold to erase an entire word 4 Send to send the message 91 All lowercase Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase Pressing this while in 123SYM mode reveals additional numeric symbols keys Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase All Uppercase Displays when all characters will be entered as uppercase characters By default the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the following letters are lower case After a word is entered and you lift your finger the cursor automatically adds a space after the word Note If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry an on screen popup appears to provide additional word choices Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE By using the on screen keyboard in portrait mode some symbols are not available such as Emoticons or Smileys In SYM mode using Swype you can only enter symbols and numbers from the on screen keyboard Once in
27. Do not take photos of people without their permission Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with another person s privacy Note An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since there is already 16GB of built in storage 143 Assigning the Default Storage Location Important Too many users can overlook this location until something goes wrong It is recommended that you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features 1 From the Home screen tap e Camera 2 From the viewfinder screen tap Settings and scroll down to the Storage entry 3 Tapthis entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos Choose from Phone or Memory card Note It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card 4 Press fay to return to the Home screen Using the Camera 5 Press Camera key until the shutter sounds The Taking Photos picture is automatically stored within your designated Taking pictures with your device s built in camera is as storage location page 123 microSD is installed simple as choosing a subject pointing the camera then all pictues are stored on the Phone For more pressing the camera key information refer to Camera Options on page 145 Note When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions
28. INCLUDING SECTIONS 9 10 AND 11 SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE 309 12 U S Government End Users Restricted Rights The Software is licensed only with restricted rights and as commercial items consisting of commercial software and commercial software documentation with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Software and Products provided to the United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued on or after December 1 1995 is provided with the commercial rights and restrictions described elsewhere herein All Software and Products provided to the United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued prior to December 1 1995 are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS as provided for in FAR 48 CFR 52 227 14 JUNE 1987 or DFAR 48 CFR 252 227 7013 OCT 1988 as applicable 13 APPLICABLE LAW This EULA is governed by the laws of TEXAS without regard to conflicts of laws principles This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded If a dispute controversy or difference is not amicably settled it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul Korea in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board The award of arbitration shall be final and
29. Mobile Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Car Company Main MMS Radio Assistant Other or Custom Note These label entries can change and are dependant on the selected destination type ex the Other and Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type Enter additional fields as desired Tap Save to complete and store the new entry Tap Cancel to delete the current entry In a single motion touch and hold the letter tab area on the right until on screen letters appear then scroll through the list You are then taken to that section of the Contacts list Touch the contact entry Note For further details about how to enter characters see Text Input Methods on page 87 Finding a Contact You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto either your SIM card your phone s built in Tabs memory or an external location such as Google Exchange Search or T Mobile Backup They are all physically separate but are Create Contacts used as a single entity called Contacts Contact field Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card the maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may Tabbed differ Navigation 1 From the Home screen tap B Contacts 2 Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed or Tap the Search contacts field and begin entering the entry s name Matching entries are then displayed This process filters through all o
30. Snapfish Play allows you to playback the current video file Delete allows you to delete the current video More provides additional options Play allows you to replay the current video file Rename allows you to rename one or more video files Multimedia 148 Camera Gallery Options The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera images 1 From the Home screen tap Lu Applications gt m Gallery 2 Select a folder location ex Camera and select an image by tapping it once to place a green check mark on the file 3 Press from this main Gallery screen to reveal gallery specific options Send via Delete and More 149 Camera Image Options 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Gallery Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the Image viewer Touch and drag a picture to the left to see the next picture or to the right to see the previous picture Tap the on screen image and use either of the following image menu options Send via allows you to share a picture using Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging Wi Fi Direct Kodak or Snapfish Delete allows you to delete the current image Press to select additional options Share via allows you to share a picture using AllShare Google Picasa or Social Hub Set as allows you to assign the current image as either as Contact photo Home screen wallpaper or Lock screen wallpaper
31. Switching to Headset during call 80 Turning on and off 215 234 Visibility 234 Visible Time Out 216 Bonus Apps 61 Browser Adding bookmarks 211 Deleting bookmarks 211 Easier to Read Pages 213 Emptying cookies 212 Entering a URL 209 Inverted Display 213 Navigation 208 Options 208 Power Saving 208 Quick Controls 214 Search Engine 214 Setting Brightness 208 Setting Color Saturation 208 Settings 212 Bubble Options 125 C Calculator Scientific Functions 174 Calendar 227 Creating an event 227 Manually Sync Events 175 Settings 227 330 Calibration 250 Call Settings 71 Call Alert 244 Call Answering Ending 244 Call Barring 245 Call Forwarding 244 Configuring 244 Call Functions 66 Answering 70 Background Calling 67 Ending 67 Ending a Call 67 Ending via Status Bar 68 Making a Multi Party Call 81 Pause Dialing 74 Redialing the last number 74 Wait dialing 74 Call Log 83 Accessing 84 Accessing from Notifications 84 Altering Numbers 86 Erasing 86 331 Call Rejection 71 243 Call Settings 243 Additional Settings 245 General 243 Call Status Tones 244 Call Volume Adjusting 79 Call Waiting 82 245 Caller ID 245 Caller Ringtone Set as 167 Calling Using Wi Fi 76 Calls Auto Reject 243 Making a 66 Multi party 81 Muting 80 Camcorder 151 Accessing the Video Folder 154 Options 152 Shooting Video 151 Camera 143 Camera Options 145 Default Storage Location 147 Taking Pictures 144 Care a
32. The Settings screen displays Wi Fi Settings This section describes the Wi Fi settings For more information refer to Wi Fi on page 222 Activating Wi Fi 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on EN A check mark indicates that Wi Fi is active The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same Screen Wi Fi settings Once set up for Wi Fi connectivity your device automatically uses Wi Fi when available for all your mobile services 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi 2 Press and then tap Advanced Configure the settings as desired The available Wi Fi connection are displayed with a security type displayed next to them Changing Your Settings 232 Network Notification By default when Wi Fi is on you receive notifications in the Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi Fi network You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi 2 Press om then tap Advanced 3 Tap Network notification A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Network notification is active 4 Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark and deactivate this feature Wi Fi Frequency Band You can now specify which wireless band is preferred for connection to other devices In some
33. The following options display 247 Silent mode via Device Options Screen Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from making noise in a theater for example In Silent Mode the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of incoming calls or other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an alert 1 From the Home screen press and hold the Lock key until Device options displays 2 Silent mode from the Device Options screen to activate or deactivate this mode the current mode displays Setup Device Vibration 1 Press and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Silent mode 3 From the Silent mode menu select either Vibrate or Mute Note This setting is independent of other call sounds settings For example if you have Silent mode enabled along with Vibrate your phone won t play a ringtone but will vibrate for an incoming call Note Use both the Silent mode and enable the Mute option to guarantee no vibrations or sounds from your device This really helps at night so you don t wake up hearing your device vibrating on a nearby counter or table Adjusting the Volume Settings The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings within one on screen popup menu 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Sound gt Volume 2 Touch and drag the on screen slider to assign the volume settings for any of the following volume levels Music video games
34. allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo Options include None Negative Grayscale and Sepia Resolution allows you to set the image size to either 8M 3264x2448 W6 5M 3264x1968 3 2M 2048x1536 W2 4M 2048x1232 0 4M 800x480 or W0 3M 640x480 Multimedia 146 147 Settings continued White balance allows you to setthis option to one ofthe following choices Auto Daylight Cloudy Incandescent or Fluorescent ISO ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital camera Choose from Auto 100 200 400 or 800 Use a lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light a higher ISO number to take photos with less light or Auto to let the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots Metering allows you to set how the camera measures or meters the light source Centre weighted Spot or Matrix Anti Shake compensates for camera movement Auto contrast provides a clear image even under backlight circumstances where intensity of illumination can vary excessively Guidelines allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off Image quality allows you to set the image quality to Superfine Fine or Normal GPS tag allows you to turn GPS On or Off also known as Geotagging The location of where the picture is taken is attached to the picture Only available in Camera mode Shutter sound allows you to set the Shutter s
35. and other media Ringtone Notifications or System 3 Tap OK to assign the volume levels Setup the Voice Call Ringtone 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Phone ringtone 3 Tap a ringtone from the available list The ringtone briefly plays when selected 4 Tap OK to assign a ringer Setting a Notification Ringtone 1 Press fay and then tap Settings gt Sound gt Default notifications 2 Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK Audible Tone Settings These options are used when you use the dialing pad make a screen selection use the lock screen want a feedback when you tap the screen Each time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone sounds 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Keytones to activate a tone when you use on screen keys A check mark displayed next to these features indicates active status 3 Tap Touch sounds to activate a tone when you touch the screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status 4 Tap Screen lock sounds to activate a tone when you use the Lock screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status Changing Your Settings 248 5 Tap Vibrate on screen tap to activate the a vibration when you press soft keys on certain screens A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates this feature is active Display Settings In this menu you can change various settings for the display suc
36. application to wirelessly synchronize your email Contacts and Calendar information directly with your company s Exchange server Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account 1 From the Home screen tap gt Email 2 If you already have other email account setup Open an existing email account press and then tap Settings gt Add new account Account name O Loading messages 133 Enter your Email address and Password information Email address your Outlook work email address Password typically your network access password case sensitive 3 Tap Push notification to activate the feature wherein new email is actively transferred pushed to the device as it arrives 4 Tap Send email from this account by default to make this your default email account for outbound emails 5 Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in the associated field Note If selected the Manual setup button changes to read Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync If activated skip to step 7 6 Tap Next Consult your Network or IT Administrator for further details and support 7 Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync from the add new email account screen Note If prompted with an on screen notification that the connection that the Setup could not finish tap Edit details to continue with a manual update of necessary information 8 When prompted to provide additional detailed information within the Ex
37. fire flooding dirt windstorm lightning earthquake exposure to weather conditions theft blown fuse or improper use of any electrical source i defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception Warranty Information 300 or transmission or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product or j Product used or purchased outside the United States This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80 of rated capacity or the battery leaks and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if i the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery ii any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering or iii the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified What are SAMSUNG s obligations During the applicable warranty period provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product at SAMSUNG s sole option without charge SAMSUNG may at SAMSUNG s sole option use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any Product or may replace the Product with a rebuilt reconditioned or new Product Repaired replaced cases pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety 90 days All other repaired replaced Products will be warranted for a
38. shadows may appear on the photo 1 From the Home screen tap e Camera 2 Using the phone s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject Note Use the Up and Down volume keys to zoom in or out 3 If desired before taking the photo use the left area of the screen to access various camera options and settings 4 You also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area of interest Multimedia 144 Camera Options Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen The following shortcuts are available for the camera Note The options disappear after a few seconds Tap the screen to display the tab then touch the tab to view these options I 145 Focus area displays the area of the image used as the main focus area Self portrait allows you to setthe front camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off On or Auto flash Settings Edit shortcuts allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most Self shot allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off On or Auto flash Shooting mode allows you to set the shooting mode Options are Single shot takes a single photo and view it before returning to the shooting mode Smile shot the camera f
39. showing the Julie image to view both 5 Tapthe main linked contact to view the contact information you linked The contacts and information displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type of account information is contained in the entry Unjoining a Contact 1 2 Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name 3 From the Home screen tap B Tap a contact name the account name from which you want to unjoin an entry This reveals the details for entry or account information Tap the Connections area Press and then tap Separate contact Tap next to the entry you want to unjoin and select OK The contacts are unjoined or separated and no longer display in the merged record screen Both contacts now go back to being separately displayed Marking a Contact as Default When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other messaging type applications the application needs to know which information is primary default in a contact entry list For example when you say Call John Smith if you have three phone records for John Smith the Voice dialer is looking for the default number or entry The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to use as the default This comes in handy when you have multiple entries for the same person 1 From the Home screen tap n 2 Tap a Contact entry 3 Press and then tap Mark as default The Mark as
40. 159 Using 159 Memo Options 184 Memory card Erasing files from the 65 Merge Calls 81 Merge with Google 106 Message Options 121 Read 123 Reply 124 Thread Options 125 Threads 124 Message Search 126 Message threads 124 Messaging Adding Attachments 122 Additional Text 123 Composing Options 121 Creating and sending 120 Creating and Sending Text Messages 120 Deleting a message 125 Google Mail 138 Icons on the Status Bar 119 Insert Smiley 121 Menu Options 121 Options 121 Settings 126 Signing into Google Mail 138 Text Templates 129 Types of Messages 119 Viewing new 123 microSD Card Insertion 12 Removal 13 336 Microsoft Exchange 101 129 Mini Diary Deleting an entry 186 Options 186 Settings 186 Missed Call Viewing from Lock Screen 86 Mobile Data Set Limit 235 Mobile data Activate Deactivate 235 Mobile HotSpot 225 Activating 225 Connecting 226 Securing 226 Mobile Networks 241 Data Roaming 241 Mobile NetworksUse Packet Data 241 Mobile Web 207 Entering Text in the Mobile Web Browser 209 Navigating with the Mobile Web 208 337 Using Bookmarks 210 MobileLife Contacts Backup 101 Motion Settings 271 Mounting the SD card 64 Move to SD card 254 Multi Party Call 81 Dropping One Participant 82 Private conversation 82 Multi party call Setting up 81 Multi party calls 81 Multi Tasking Background Calling 67 Music 187 Volume 248 Music App Adding Songs to Playlists 165 Changing Library
41. 166 displays the current song in the player window Making a Song a Phone Ringtone 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Music player 2 Tap the All tab 3 Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the on screen context menu 4 Tap Set as gt Phone ringtone Music Player Options The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays m With the music player application displayed and playing a song press and select one of the following options Add to quick list adds the selected music file to a quick playlist Via Bluetooth plays the music through a Bluetooth stereo headset 167 Share music via shares a music file via AllShare Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct Set as sets this song as a Phone ringtone Caller ringtone or Alarm tone Add to playlist adds a song to the playlist Settings allows you to activate or deactivate the Equalizer Sound effects Music menu Lyrics or Music auto off Details displays details about the selected music Using Playlists Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device or using a third party application such as Windows Media Player and downloading those files to an SD card inserted into the device Creating a
42. 2 Follow the on screen prompts The application contains two separate streaming media options My device allows you to stream share selected multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device connected to the same WAP Remote device allows you to receive and playback media stored externally server laptop etc directly on your device Configuring AllShare Settings The AllShare application must first be configured prior to its initial use You must setup parameters such as connected Wi Fl Items to share source server address and external device acceptance rights 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt AllShare 2 Press and then tap Settings and configure the following settings as desired Device name defaults to your phone Use the keypad to enter a new Media server if desired and tap Save Share videos photos music allows you to restrict what is shared from your phone Tap the items you want to share Upload from other devices allows you set the phone to select how uploads from other devices are started Tap Always accept Always ask or Always reject Default memory allows you to have media saved to your Phone or Memory Card Tap an option Subtitles allows you to see subtitles on shared media Depending on the setting you changed a pop up screen may display to restart AllShare Tap Yes to continue Transmitting Media via AllShare 1 Tap the My device tab select Videos Pho
43. 29 communicating Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the characteristics of your device s Bluetooth service including Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth communication and description Setting your device s visibility or discoverability for other Bluetooth devices Displaying your device s Bluetooth address To access the Bluetooth Settings menu 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 Verify Bluetooth is active indicated by Eo Press and tap the Device name Visible time out and Show received files fields to set the options To change your Bluetooth name Verify Bluetooth is active From the Bluetooth settings page tap Device name Enter a new name Pep os Tap OK to complete the rename process To set visibility 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active From the top of the Bluetooth settings page toggle the state of the visibility check mark Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate Note Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible time out field 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 1 Hour or Never This value appears as a countdown within this Visible time out field To scan for Bluetooth devices 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page tap Scan for devices to search for visible external Bluetooth compatible d
44. After the SD card will be unmounted message displays and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list remove the SD card For more information refer to Removing the microSD Memory Card on page 13 SD card Memory Status To view the memory allocation for your external SD card m Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Storage The available memory displays under the Total space and Available space headings Erasing Files from the SD card To erase files from the SD card using the device 1 Ensure the SD card is mounted For more information refer to Unmounting the SD card on page 65 2 Press and then tap Settings gt Storage gt Mount SD card 65 3 Tap Format SD card gt Format SD card gt Delete all to format the SD card The SD card formats and erases all the data stored on it Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to the factory default settings 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Settings gt Back up and reset 2 Tap Factory data reset This action erases all data from your device except current system software and bundled applications or SD card files such as music or photos Note This feature provides an option to format the internal USB storage not the microSD card 3 Tap Format USB storage to erase all data stored on the device s internal storage area 4 Tap Reset device gt Delete all Section 4 Call Functions and Contacts List This
45. Mail service Text Message 54 to send the current number a new text message To view additional dialing options Tap 5I Contacts takes you to the Contacts list Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a new or existing Contacts entry Send message to send the current caller a text message while still maintaining the current call active Speed dial setting to provide you access to the speed dial Settings screen Add 2 sec pause to insert a two second pause to enter a 2 second delay within a number string the phone continues dialing after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string the phone waits for your input A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be manually sent by tapping Send Call settings to provide you access to the Call settings screen Answering a Call When somebody calls you the phone rings and displays the incoming call image The caller s phone number picture or name if stored in Contacts List displays At the incoming call screen Touch and slide GE in any direction to answer the call Touch and slide EG in any direction to reject the call Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and tap a predefined rejection message or tap Create new message to create a new custom outgoing response Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer If the incoming call is from a number stored i
46. OR USE OF SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER PURCHASER S PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND ON AN AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY ACCURACY LACK OF VIRUSES QUIET ENJOYMENT NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET PURCHASER S REQUIREMENTS THAT THE OPERATION OF THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED PURCHASER ASSUMES THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS M
47. Play Store 47 Polaris Office 47 Pro Apps 47 Search 47 Settings 47 Sharing with Others 58 Slacker 48 Social Hub 48 Storage Used 254 Task 48 Task Manager 49 TeleNav GPS 49 201 T Mobile Name ID 48 T Mobile TV 48 T Mobile Video Chat 48 Using the Camcorder 151 Using the Camera 144 Utility 49 Video Player 49 203 Visual Voicemail 49 Voice Command 49 Voice Recorder 50 204 Voice Talk 50 YouTube 50 204 Zinio 50 Applications and Development 172 Asphalt 6 173 Audio Output Mode 269 Auto Redial 245 Auto Reject Configuration 71 Auto Reject List 243 Auto Reject Mode 243 Automatic Answering 244 Automatic Restore 268 B Back up My Account 268 My Data 268 Backup and Restore 268 Battery Charging 14 Display Percentage 16 250 Extending Life 16 Installing 13 Low Battery Indicator 16 Removal 13 Saving Power 17 Wall Charger 14 Battery Cover Removal 9 Replace 10 Battery Life Extending 16 Battery Usage 252 Battery Use amp Safety 284 Bing Set Search Engine 214 Blacklist Adding 107 Blio eBooks T Mobile 173 Bluetooth 234 About 215 Change Name 216 Deleting a Paired Device 218 Device Name 234 Disconnecting a Paired Device 217 Off 215 234 On 215 234 Paring Devices 216 Review Downloaded Files 216 Scan for Devices 216 Scanning for other Devices 235 Sending Contact Information 218 Sending Contacts Via 218 Sending Namecard 112 Set Visibility 216 Settings 215 Status indicators 215
48. Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap Music player 2 Tap the Playlists tab Press and then tap Create 4 Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new name for this playlist then tap Save Applications gt Adding Music to a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap Music player 2 Tap the Playlists tab 3 the playlist name in which to add music 4 Press and then tap Add to playlist Applications gt Tap Add music This option is available within user created playlists Note If a playlist is empty add a song by touching a holding a song name from the main screen to open the context menu Select Add to playlist and choose the playlist 5 music file or tap Select all to add all the music tracks to this playlist then tap Add 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Music player 2 Tap the Playlists tab 3 the playlist name in which to delete music Removing Music from a Li 4 Touch and hold a song to reveal the on screen context menu 5 Tap Remove gt OK Editing a Playlist Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist you can also share delete or rename the playlist Note Only those playlist you have created can be edited Default playlists can not be renamed 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Music player 2 Tap the Playlists tab 3 Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on scr
49. Press and then tap Search 3 Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap 4 All messages that contain the entered search string display Messaging Settings To configure the settings for text messages multimedia messages Voice mails and Push messages 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press and then tap Settings The following Messaging settings are available Settings Message font size enables the phone to change the display size for the on screen front Choose from Normal Small or Tiny Split view enables the phone to display a split view window when the phone is in landscape view Storage settings Delete old messages deletes old messages when the limit is reached rather than overwriting them Text message limit allows you to set a limit on how many text messages are allowed in one conversation Multimedia message limit allows you to set a limit on how many multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation Messages 126 Text message SMS settings Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered Manage SIM card messages allows you to manage the messages stored on the SIM card Message center allows you to enter the number of your message center where your messages reside while the system is attempting to deliver them Input mode allows you to set the input mode for your text messages Choose f
50. Products are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date Phone 1 Year Batteries 1 Year Case Pouch Holster 90 Days Other Phone Accessories 1 Year What is not covered This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product This Limited Warranty does not cover a defects or damage resulting from accident misuse abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to liquid moisture dampness sand or dirt neglect or unusual physical electrical or electromechanical stress b scratches dents and cosmetic damage unless caused by SAMSUNG c defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen d equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed defaced damaged altered or made illegible e ordinary wear and tear f defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories products or ancillary peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG g defects or damage resulting from improper testing operation maintenance installation service or adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG h defects or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an object
51. Read the on screen notification regarding data use and tap OK To disconnect tethering 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt More gt USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the check mark and deactivate the feature Remove the USB cable from the phone Connections 224 Mobile HotSpot This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi Fi HotSpot The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA 4G data services although 3G service can also be used The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Important The Mobile HotSpot service can not be active at the same time as Wi Fi Please close your Wi Fi connection prior to launching this service Note You must have a tethering plan on your account to use the Mobile HotSpot You can not use data on the device while it is being used as a HotSpot To activate the Mobile HotSpot service 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More gt USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Mobile HotSpot slider to the right to turn it on EN 225 3 Readthe on screen notification regarding data use and tap OK 4 Tap Mobile HotSpot 5 Press and then tap Configure 6 Create a new Network SSID name and then write it down 7 Tap Save to store the new settings 8
52. Save Note Similar setup process can be used for the remaining VPN types IPSec Xauth PSK IPSec Xauth RSA and IPSec Hybrid RSA Connecting to a VPN 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Settings gt More gt VPN settings 2 Tap the VPN entry you want to connect to Enter any requested credentials into the pop up that opens 4 Tap Connect 237 Edit a VPN 1 5 Press and then tap Settings gt gt VPN settings Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit In the pop up that opens select Edit network Make the desired VPN setting changes Tap Save Delete a VPN 1 2 3 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt More gt VPN settings Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete Tap Delete network within the pop up that opens up Wi Fi Calling You can configure your device to make and receive calls over an active Wi Fi connection Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes For more information refer to Wi Fi Calling on page 76 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar 2 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt More 3 Tap the Wi Fi Calling field and place a green check mark in the adjacent field This check mark indicates the feature is active Wi Fi Call
53. Social H bner 198 T Mobile Name ID 199 T Mobile TV 199 MERERI TEES TEE 199 Task Manager 200 TeleNav GPS 201 Utili emo 201 T Mobile Video Chat 202 Videos 203 Visual Voicemail 203 Voice Command 203 Voice Recorder 204 Voice Talk 204 vate 204 YouTube 204 206 Section 10 Connections 207 207 Bluetooth 215 Enable Downloading for Web Applications 218 PC Connections 219 KIESA sists dice due drea ER ERE das 220 WiFi cue taret et erroe 222 Tethering 224 5 Mobile HotSpot 225 Section 11 Time Management 227 Calendar ceca cater 227 COCK PETERE 228 World Clock 230 230 Setting a Timer 231 Configuring a Desk Clock 231 Section 12 Changing Your Settings 232 Accessing Settings 232 Wi Fi 232 Bluetooth settings 234 Data 235 More Settings 236 Call SettingS
54. Through the Application Menus There are four default Application Menu screens available As you add more applications from the Play Store more screens are created to house these new apps 1 Press and then tap L Applications The first Application Menu displays To close the Applications screen tap or press 2 Sweep the screen to access the other menus 3 any of the on screen icons to launch the associated application Understanding Your Device 54 Using Sub Menus Sub menus are available from within most screen and applications 1 Press r A sub menu displays at the bottom of the screen 2 an available on screen option CO Join contact Markas default lt lt Share namecard via Ade to reject list Sub Menu items 55 Using Context Menus Context menus also called pop up menus contain options that apply to a specific item on the screen They function similarly to menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on your desktop computer Touch and hold an item on screen to open its context menu Delete Context Menu Join contact Share contact information Remove from favorites Accessing Recently Used Applications 1 Press and hold Ol to open the recently used applications window Note This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task manager 2 A pop up displays the six most recently used applications 3
55. View 162 Changing Settings 162 Creating a Playlist 165 Deleting a Playlist 166 Listening 163 Music Application 161 Now Playing Screen 163 Options While Playing 164 Playing 163 Playing a Playlist 166 Searching for Music 162 Tab Options 164 Music Files Removing 169 Transferring 169 Music Player Adding Music 168 Creating a Playlist 167 Editing a Playlist 168 Making a Song a Ringtone 167 Options 167 Playing Music 166 Removing Music 168 Using Playlists 167 MusicPlayer 166 N Namecard Sending 111 Sending All 111 Share Via 111 Navigating Application Menus 54 Sub Menus 55 Through Screens 51 Netflix 191 Network connection Adding a new 223 Network Mode 2G Network 242 3G Network 242 New applications Downloading 194 News amp Weather 191 NFC Near Field Communication 239 Noise Reduction 81 Non Play Store Applications 196 Notification Bar 35 Using 35 Notifications Volume 248 0 Offensive Words Block 266 On Off Switch 19 Operating Environment 293 Organizer Calculator 174 World Clock 230 Other Downloads 176 Other Important Safety Information 298 Out of Office Message 137 Settings 137 Outlook 129 Synchronizing 256 Overview Home Screen 37 Owner Information 260 P Passwords Make Visible 261 Pause Dialing 74 People Video Chat 202 Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN 283 Phone Icons 30 Switching on off 19 Phone number Finding 66 Phone Ringtone 248 Set as 167 Photo Editor 1
56. YouTube High Quality 205 High Qulaity 171 Settings 205 Video Chat 202 Z Zinio 206
57. a previously entered phone number 8 Enter additional information such as Email Address Events Groups Ringtone or tap Add another field to input additional category information Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Organization IM Notes Nickname or Website Contacts 102 Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry Tap Cancel to delete the current entry To save a Number from your Keypad 1 2 3 103 From the Home screen tap Phone Enter a phone number using the on screen dialpad Tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list or Press and then tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list e f you re updating an existing contact tap the entry from the list and proceed to step 5 Tap the destination field and choose from MobileLife Contacts Google SIM Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Phone depending on where you want to save the new contact information Tap the First name and Last name fields and enter a name for this contact Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact Selections are Take photo or Select picture from Gallery Tap the label button to the left of the Phone field and scroll through the list to select a category such as Home default
58. add additional carbon copy recipients Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients 7 Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject 8 Tap the email text field and compose your email message To add a picture attachment tap Attach from the bottom of the screen and make a category selection Tap the file you wish to attach Tap to delete the attached file Note If you attach an image to your email you have the option to resize it prior to delivery Choose from Original Large 70 Medium 30 or Small 10 Once chosen tap OK 9 Once complete tap Send Deleting an Exchange Email Message Touch and hold an email from your inbox list and select Delete from the on screen context menu With the email message displayed tap Delete Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Accounts and sync Tap adjacent to the Microsoft Exchange account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen Toggle any of the available fields to force the device to manually resync the parameter or From the current Email inbox listing press and then tap Settings Exchange email account and specify the email settings you wish to synchronize Account name displays the name used by the device to track the account Add signature activates the email signature featu
59. all you have is a generic name ex Android 12345 It is recommended you provide your connection with a unique name 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt More gt Wi Fi Direct 2 Press and then tap Device name 3 Edit the current name and tap OK to save the new identification To activate your connection 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt More 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Wi Fi Direct slider to the right to turn it on eng A check mark displayed next to the feature indicating it is enabled 3 Read the on screen information and tap OK 4 Tap Scan After scan tap a device name to begin the connection process to another Wi Fi Direct compatible device Note The target device must also have Wi Fi Direct service active and running before it can be detected by your device 5 Tap Connect The direct connection is then established 6 When prompted to complete the connection tap OK The status field now reads Connected and your connected device is listed within the Wi Fi Direct devices listing Changing Your Settings 240 Mobile networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Mobile networks options m Press and then tap Settings gt More gt Mobile networks The following options display Use packet data Allows you to activate data usage on your phone m Press cay gt and then tap Settin
60. and Cautions 297 Fixed Dialing Numbers 245 Folder Creating and Managing 61 Deleting 62 Renaming 61 Font Style 250 Font Size Caption 205 Minimum Setting 213 G Gallery Folder Options 149 Image Options 149 Opening 156 Games Volume 248 Gestures Overview 53 Tilt to Zoom 53 271 Getting Started 8 Battery 13 Battery Cover 9 Locking Unlocking the Device 19 microSD card 12 SIM Card 10 Switching Device On Off 19 Voice Mail 22 Gmail 138 177 Composing a message 139 Creating an Additional Account 140 Opening 138 Other Options 139 Refreshing 139 Signing In 138 Viewing 139 Google Account Dashboard 267 Account Management Settings 256 Account Syncronization 255 Add Account 255 Adding a Sync Account 255 Create New Account 20 Merge Contacts 106 Retrieving Password 21 Set Search Engine 214 Signing into Your Account 21 Voice Typing 87 Google Books 193 Google Location Services 182 189 257 Enabling 257 Google Mail see also Gmail 139 Google Maps Enabling a location source 182 Opening a map 182 Google Music 161 193 Google Search 198 Settings 273 Google Talk 48 199 Google Voice Typing Configuring 98 266 Using 99 334 GPS amp AGPS 288 GPS Satellites 182 189 257 GPS Tag 147 GPU Force Rendering 273 Groups Adding an Member to an Existing Group 117 Creating a new caller group 117 Deleting 118 Deleting a Caller Group 118 Editing a Caller Group 118 Removing an Entry 117 Sett
61. and share call logs videos photos music bookmarks ringtones and even send SMS messages from your PC 2 From the Home screen tap m From the Home screen tap Applications gt Kies air For more information refer to Kies Air on page 220 Latitude Google Latitude allows you and your friends share locations and status messages with each other It also lets you send instant messages and emails make phone calls and get directions to your friends locations Important You must sign in to your Google account enable Wi Fi and enable the Location feature before you can use this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 232 Note Although you do not have to enable location services in order to use Latitude it is recommended for best accuracy 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt E Latitude Applications and Development 178 Important For best results it is recommended that you enable all of your location services For more information refer to Location Services on page 257 2 Tap Wi Fi Disabled Click to enable connection to navigate to the Wi Fi Settings menu where you can turn on Wi Fi if it is not already enabled For more information refer to Wi Fi on page 222 3 If prompted with the Improve My Location screen tap Settings to configure the necessary settings or Skip to continue on without making a change 4 Tap MAP VIEW to return to t
62. areas interference can cause bad connections in certain frequency bands connecting to an alternate option can improve performance 1 Press Fay gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi 2 Press gx and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi Frequency band 3 Select Auto 5 GHz only or 2 4 GHz only 233 Manually Adding a Wi Fi Network 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi gt Add network Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless Access Point Tap the Security field and select a security option This must match the current security setting on your target WAP Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the target WAP Note An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN Its purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN whether accidentally or intentionally To communicate wireless devices must be configured with the same SSID Bluetooth settings In this menu you can activate Bluetooth view or assign a device name activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can discover it or scan for other available Bluetooth devices with which to pair For more information refer to Bluetooth on page 215 Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on EN The slider color ind
63. automatically tries to correct errors caused when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list after selecting the wrong word from the list XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built in XT9 dictionary Tap Add word Use the Register to XT9 my words field to enter the new Word Tap Done to store the new word XT9 auto substitution allows you to create a word rule by adding words for automatic substitution during text entry for example youve becomes you ve Tap the XT9 auto substitution field Flick up or down to review the current list of word substitutions Press and tap Add Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field for example youve Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field for example you fve Tap Done to save the substitution rule 4 Press to return to the previous screen Configure Google Voice Typing 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default gt Google voice typing zip From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select La gt Google voice typing 2 The virtual keyboard is then removed and all subsequent input to done via the microphone as text to speech
64. both the characters of the keys you touched and those of nearby characters A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Auto append automatically adds predictions to the word you are typing A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Auto substitution allows the device to automatically replace misspelled or miskeyed words This option reduce typos A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list after selecting the wrong word from the list XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built in XT9 dictionary Tap Add word Use the Register to XT9 my words field to enter the new word Tap Done to store the new word XT9 auto substitution allows you to create a word rule by adding words for automatic substitution during text entry for example youve becomes you ve Tap the XT9 auto substitution field Flick up or down to review the current list of word substitutions Press and tap Add Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field for example youve Enter the substitute
65. check mark 3 Tap Scan for devices Your device displays a list of discovered in range Bluetooth devices 4 Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing 5 Enter the passkey or PIN code if needed and tap OK 6 The external device must accept the connection and enter your device s PIN code Once successfully paired to an external device displays in the Status area From the Bluetooth settings page touch and hold the name of the previously paired device and select Disconnect Note Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off Note Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth compatible devices display and operations may be different and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth compatible devices 217 Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device Deleting a device from your list removes its connection record and upon reconnection would require that you re enter all the previous pairing information 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page touch and hold the name of the previously paired device from the bottom of the page This opens the connected device s menu options 3 Tap Unpair to delete the paired device Sending Contacts via Bluetooth Depending on your paired devices settings and capabilities you may be able to send pictures Cont
66. children be discouraged from using cell phones at all For example The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000 In this report a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations updated 10 1 2010 FCC RF Safety Program http www fcc gov oet rfsafety Environmental Protection Agency EPA http Awww epa gov radtown wireless tech html Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA http www osha gow SLTC radiofrequencyradiation Note This web address is case sensitive National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH http www cdc gov niosh World Health Organization WHO http www who int peh emf en International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection http www icnirp de Health Protection Agency http www hpa org uk Topics Radiation Health and Safety Information 280 US Food and Drug Administration http www fda gov Radiation EmittingProducts RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures HomeBusinessandEntertainment CellPhones default htm Specific Abs
67. com Social Hub Terms and Conditions Acceptance of the Terms These Social Hub Terms and Conditions together with the Social Hub Privacy Policy and Social Hub End User Licence Agreement collectively Terms govern your use of Social Hub which comprises all content and services accessible through Social Hub including third party content and services and if applicable the website where you accessed these Terms collectively the Service The Terms constitute an agreement between you and Samsung Warranty Information 310 Electronics Co Ltd and its affiliates collectively Samsung with respect to the Service By using the Service you agree to be legally bound to the Terms You are not allowed to use the Service if you do not agree to the Terms To the extent permitted by applicable law Samsung reserves the right to modify update supplement revise or otherwise change the Terms and to impose new or additional rules policies terms or conditions in relation to the Service from time to time with or without notice to you Amendments Samsung may provide you with notice of the Amendments by sending an email message to the email address listed in your account information if any or by posting the notice on the Social Hub website Such Amendments will be effective immediately and incorporated into the Terms upon sending or posting of such notice You are responsible for regularly reviewing the Terms Your continued use
68. composing a message press 2 Add text 2 Atthe Add text screen select one of the following Location allows you to add an address and the link to the location on Google Maps Contacts allows you to add the name and phone number of any of your contacts to your message Memo allows you to select a current Memo then add it by tapping Attach Task allows you to select a current Task then add it by tapping Attach Calendar allows you to select a current Calendar event then add it by tapping Add 123 Text templates allows you to add pre defined phrases and sentences For more information refer to Text Templates on page 129 The information is added to your message Viewing Newly Received Messages When you receive a message your phone notifies you by displaying within the Notification area at the top left of your Home screen To read a message 1 Open the Notification Bar and select the message For more information refer to Notification Bar on page 35 or From the Home screen tap ES then tap the new message to view its contents The selected message displays on the screen 2 Tap to play a multimedia message To pause playback of the multimedia message tap 3 Ina single motion touch and scroll up or down the page to scroll through the message if additional pages were added Message Threads Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into message threads Threaded messages allo
69. device and play it back Connect your device to the computer via USB and transfer this video For more information refer to Communicating with the SD card on page 64 9 10 11 12 From the Registration screen Transfer click Transfer Video now and select the location of the microSD card or USB the device as the target destination for the registration video created in step 6 and click Start or Locate the created file copy and paste it into the new drive letter corresponding to your device s storage location From the Home screen tap Lu Applications gt Files Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file to play it Once you play the registration file on your device your registration is complete Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen from within your computer s DivX Player and confirm both your computer and your new device appears in the list of registered DivX devices Important There is no special registration or configuration necessary to playback DRM free DivX movies Registration of your device is only required for playback of protected DivX material Media Hub Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content With hundreds of titles available entertaining your family on the go was never easier You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from any location Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for Samsung Media Hub is your
70. enabl Such as Encryption Encryption algori algorithms Email certificates and Security policy list These security policies co Servers Security policy list lists the These policies co Servers e case of sync conflict allows you source on emails I Id restrict some Id restrict some fu there is a conflic S Choose from 2 weeks 1 month 3 several security options ithm Sign Sign unctions from corporate It email s security policy tions from corporate 0 assign the master with the current email sync you can assign the server as the main source for all emails Update to device or assign the phone to be the main source and update the server accord ingly Update to server Auto resend times enables the phone to resend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon when new email messages have been received Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or upcoming event is pending Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is pending Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain user name Password and Exchange server settings Sync email synchronizes emails between your device and the remote exchange server Sync contacts synchronizes the contacts between your device and the remote exchange server Sync calendar synchroni
71. from the folders and then open the Gallery Opening the Gallery the Home screen tap FA Applications gt oa Gallery For more information refer to Camera Gallery Options on page 149 Note If you stored your files in folders directories on the storage card Gallery displays these folders as separate albums The top left album contains all the pictures in the storage card Using the Video Player The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card This device is able to playback DivX videos 1 rom the Home screen tap Applications l ELI Utility gt gt Video player A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list 2 Tapa video file to begin viewing DivX Overview This device is able to playback DivX videos DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p including premium content If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device the message Authorization Error will be displayed and your content will not play Learn more at www divx com vod Your device must first be registered to playback protected or purchased DivX content DRM free or unprotected content does not required DivX VOD registration Locating Your VOD Registration Number 1 Press CN gt and then tap io Settings gt About phone gt Legal information gt License settings gt DivX VOD gt Register Multimedia 156 2 3 Write down your Registration code
72. in Messenger Google sends an update to your phone 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 20 to gt Messenger 2 From the Home screen tap or From the Google application select Messenger For more information refer to Messenger on page 142 Messaging This application allows you to use the Short Message Service SMS to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile phones You can also use the Multi Media Service MMS to create multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile phones 185 m From the Home screen tap Applications gt E Messaging For more information refer to Messages on page 119 Mini Diary This application allows you to create a mini diary where you can add a photo and text to describe an event or other memorable life event 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Utility gt Mini diary Any diary entries display in a list 2 If prompted tap Yes to allow required network connectivity 3 Tap the Tap to add photo field to add a photo for this diary event and touch the source Selections are Camera or Gallery 4 Tap the Add location area of the screen enter text then tap Done 5 Tap the Tap to add text area of the screen and enter text then tap Done 6 Tap the weather data icon in the upper right corner above the photo and select a weather condition from t
73. linked joined together into a single entry To resync Social Network Contacts 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Settings Accounts Important This process not only synchronizes your contact and sync information but also your status events and more 2 Tap within the adjacent SNS account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 1 Press and then tap Settings Accounts 3 Tap Sync Now and sync gt Add account Facebook 2 Select your country read and accept the terms of the Note From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap Social Hub then tap Agree Sync all to resync all accounts 3 Read the on screen descriptions and tap Next 4 Log into your Facebook account Enter your account s access Email and Password information and tap Log in 115 Additional Contact Options Sending an Email to a Contact Note Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can use the Send email feature 1 From the Home screen tap B 2 Press and then tap Send email Contacts that contain an email address display 3 Tap the contact s to which you want to send an email A check mark displays next to the selection Note The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen 4 GB 5 Select an email account type 6 Compose the email and tap Send ExportlImport For more information refer to Copying Contact Information on page 112 Contact L
74. machine 1 Sign onto the same Wi Fi network from your phone and from your PC Connections 220 2 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Kies air 3 From the Kies air home screen tap Start 4 Ifprompted select a network Choose from either Wi Fi or Portable Wi Fi hotspot 5 Write down the on screen URL address Important Both your phone and your computer must be connected to the same Wireless Access Point WAP 6 From your computer enter the URL in your Web browser 7 f prompted an Access Request prompt is displayed on your device Tap Allow to permit connection between the computer and device 8 On your computer you may be prompted to run a Java plugin for a TransferManagerApplet Click Run 9 Tap the Remember for today checkbox if you will be using Kies air with the same PC later 221 10 11 12 13 14 From your PC a security warning may be displayed asking if you want to run this application Click Run to continue On your PC the Kies air screen is displayed On your phone the icon appears at the top of your Screen Follow the on screen instructions to view and share information between your phone and PC Click a link from the left navigation pane to access one of several device file categories such as Device Name provides an overview of all the main categories Photos Videos Music Ringtones Bookmarks lessages Call Log Contacts File Explorer Language setti
75. microSD card you will need to verify the Debugging mode is not Your data may become damaged or lost if the enabled battery runs out while you are using the microSD card 3 Configure the device for USB mass storage mode connection by verifying Debugging mode is not Mounting the SD Card To store photos music videos and other applications You e Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Developer must mount install the SD card prior to use Mounting the options SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer e Remove a check mark from the USB debugging field if Important You must enable USB storage to mount the SD present card 4 Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable to the computer 1 Press A ae and then tap Settings gt Storage 5 Confirm the new mounted drive appears as a new drive 2 Tap Mount SD card on your computer As soon as the connection is Communicating with the SD card established a drive letter is assigned to the phone s 1 Insert the SD card into the external SD card slot For storage device more information refer to Installing the microSD 6 To disconnect the new drive simply remove the USB Memory Card on page 12 cable from your device Memory Card 64 Unmounting the SD card Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD card while removing it from the slot 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Storage 2 Tap Unmount SD card gt OK 3
76. multi party session it might be necessary to place one of those participants on hold so that a private conversation can be held with a single caller While you are in a multi party call 1 Press and then tap Manage conference call 2 Tap adjacent to the participants you would like to split from the current multi line call The list displays the callers in the order they were dialed Split Caller End Call 3 the participant to which you want to speak privately You can now talk privately to that person while the other participants can continue to converse with each other If there is only one other participant that person is placed on hold 4 Toreturn to the multi party call tap the Merge icon All of the multi party call participants can now hear each other Dropping One Participant 1 Press gx and then tap Manage conference call 2 Tap to the right of the number to drop The participant is disconnected and you can continue the call with the other participant 3 Tap to end your conversation with the remaining caller Call Waiting You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress if this service is supported by the network and you have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 245 To answer a new call while you have a call in progress
77. not using Wi Fi and to clear the cache that holds the color represents how fast the traffic is moving map tiles Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Location Settings lets you access and configure the location Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the settings best imagery available most of which is approximately one to three years old Terrain combines a topographical view of the area s terrain with the current map location Transit Lines displays the overlapping transit lines on your map Latitude allows you to see your friend s locations and share your location with them Labs this is a testing ground for experimental features thal aren t ready for primetime They may change break or disappear at any time Click on a Lab to enable or disable it Terms Privacy amp Notices displays the Terms and Conditions Privacy Policy o r Legal Notices information Select the desired information from the pop up menu Feedback allows you to provide application feedback 183 About displays general information about Google maps such as Version Platform Locale Total data sent Total data received Free memory etc Help provides help information Media Hub m From the Home screen tap tg Applications gt ww Media Hub For more information refer to Media Hub on page 158 Memo This feature allows
78. of the Service will be deemed to constitute your acceptance of any and all such Amendments Eligibility To use the Service you must be at least sixteen 16 years of age If you are at least sixteen 16 years of age but are a minor for legal purposes where you live you must review the 311 Terms and have your parent or legal guardian accept the Terms on your behalf in order for you to use the Service The person accepting the Terms on your behalf must be legally competent Your Information When required to provide information in connection with your use of the Service you agree to provide truthful and complete information Providing misleading information about your identity is forbidden When you first use the Service you may be required to create a username and a password You and your parent or legal guardian if you are a minor are personally responsible for any use of the Service with your username and password You agree to take due care in protecting your username and password against misuse by others and promptly notify Samsung about any misuse Termination of Service Samsung may terminate or restrict your access to certain parts of the Service if there is an indication that you have breached the Terms or at any time in its sole discretion Your Material Except as set forth in the Social Hub Privacy Policy Samsung shall not be responsible for any removal of the information or content you have submitted in
79. period equal to the 301 remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety 90 days whichever is longer All replaced Products parts components boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG Except to any extent expressly allowed by applicable law transfer or assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited What must you do to obtain warranty service To obtain service under this Limited Warranty you must return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping accompanied by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase the serial number of the Product and the seller s name and address To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1 888 987 4357 If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty you must pay all parts shipping and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service What are the limits on SAMSUNG s liability THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG S RESPONSIBILITIES AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT
80. relatively immune to interference noise Under the current industry standard American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 the hearing aid and wireless mobile device rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are together For example if a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating the sum of the two values equals M5 Under the standard this should provide the hearing aid user with normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless mobile device A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent performance However these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied T ratings work similarly eee 13 T2 Health and Safety Information 296 The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 standard HAC for Newer Technologies This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses However there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations using your hearing aid or cochlear implant to determine if you hear any interfering noise Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compa
81. services and content you access through the Service and the telecommunications carriers and the network through which you access the Service are provided and hosted by your selected third party content and service providers who typically has a privacy policy of its own We recommend you familiarize yourself with your service provider s privacy policy Samsung is not responsible for the privacy or any other practices of such service providers Although your messages will be transmitted through 315 Samsung s servers Samsung will not process the content or headers of your messages for any purpose other than as necessary to deliver and manage your messages unless otherwise required by law In connection with certain services accessible via the Service Samsung may cooperate with your operator and other third parties Samsung may receive from such third parties certain device specific non personal information such as device serial number of the devices sold by the operator with preinstalled software for the Service Such information may be used for aanalyzing the activation of the Service LIMITATION OF LIABILITY THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED ON AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE BASIS TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SERVICE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR OR VIRUS FREE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS O
82. so that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet connection Brightness and color allows you to manually adjust the screen brightness and set one of four available color levels associated with different power saving profiles The higher the power saving level the less intense the on screen color saturation Note If the Automatic brightness feature is enabled Settings Display gt Brightness you can not modify the browser s brightness setting Downloads displays the download history Print provides print access on compatible Samsung printers Settings allows you to change the way you view your web pages by changing these options See Browser Settings on page 212 Connections 208 Entering a URL You can access a website quickly by entering the URL Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone To enter a URL and go to a particular website m From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the screen enter the URL and tap ey Note This is not the same application as the Google Search Widget The web2go screen can not be accessed via a Wi Fi connection Search the Internet To perform an Internet search using keywords 1 From within the Google search application tap the Google search field enter the keyword s to search using the on screen keypad 2 Tap from the list of search results that are displayed 3 Tapa link to view the website 209 Adding and Deleting Windows You
83. the Accounts and sync option synchronizes the data from the selected account type with your Contacts list 1 Press gt and then tap Settings Accounts and sync gt Add account 2 Determine which type of account information you want to synchronize with your Contact list Selections are Facebook LinkedIn Twitter Windows Live Hotmail Yahoo mail Blio eBooks T Mobile Google Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync MobileLife Contacts Samsung or T Mobile Video Chat 3 Tap an account type to add 4 Follow the prompts The selected account type synchronizes with your Contacts list Contacts 114 5 After synchronizing accounts you may want to link 5 Tap those contact settings you wish to synchronize all contact information For more information refer to are enabled by default A green circle indicates the Joining Contact Information on page 108 feature is enabled To add Facebook content to your Contacts list Choose from Sync contacts Sync message or Sync You can now add your Facebook contact information such as calendar pictures email and phone numbers directly to your Contacts 6 Tap Done to complete the login and sync process list All of their current contact information is then migrated 7 Tap n to confirm your Facebook contacts are now over to your phone If a Contacts entry already exists with a synchronized and appear in your Contacts list slightly different name separate entries are created and can later be
84. there is a security issue with the current website Remove the check mark to disable this function Accept cookies Allows sites that require cookies to save and read cookies from your device Clear all cookie data Deletes all current browser cookie files Remember form data Allows the device to store data from any previously filled out forms Remove the check mark to disable this function Clear form data Deletes any stored data from previously filled out forms Tap OK to complete the process Enable location Allows websites to request access to your location 213 Clear location access Clears location access for all websites Tap OK to complete the process Remember passwords Stores usernames and passwords for visited sites Remove the check mark to disable this function Clear passwords Deletes any previously stored usernames or passwords Tap OK to complete the process Accessibility Force zoom Allows you to override a website s zoom setting and forces a zoom view Text size Allows you to manually adjust the size of the on screen text size double tap zoom and minimum font size via the use of an on screen slider Inverted rendering Allows you to adjust the way a Web page is displayed to make it easier to view or read Enabling this feature causes a page to rendered in reverse Black becomes white and vice versa On screen white text is displayed as white text on a black background Con
85. to on screen input Move the slider between Fast Response speed or Error Tolerant accuracy and tap OK Reset Swype s dictionary once enabled deletes any words you have added to Swype s dictionary 6 Locate the About section to review the Swype application information Version lists the Swype version number 7 Tap Language Options to activate and select the current text input language Default language is US English 89 Swype Text Entry Tips You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or tutorial on using Swype You can also use the following Swype text entry tips Create a squiggle like an S shape to create a double letter such as pp in apple Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a selection Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions Double touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled word then touch the delete key to erase one character Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word wer t yu iA asd o f j k I tz cvbhm Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype 1 Note After typing an initial uppercase character the 8 key From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard With Swype as your text entry method select one of the following text mode options 123 ABC to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from the
86. to set the flash options to Off or On When you set the flash to On it stays on continually while you are taking a video Recording mode allows youto setthe recording mode to Normal is limited only by available space on the destination location Limit MMS is limited by MMS size restrictions Self recording activates the front facing camera so you can video yourself Exposure value allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider Multimedia 152 153 Settings continued Timer allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a video Options include Off 2 sec 5 sec and 10 sec Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo Options include None Negative Grayscale and Sepia Resolution allows you to set the image size to either 1920x1080 1280x720 720x480 640x480 320x240 or 176x144 White balance allows you to set this option to one of the following choices Auto Daylight Cloudy Incandescent or Fluorescent Video quality allows you to set the image quality to Superfine Fine or Normal Guidelines allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off Storage allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card if inserted Reset allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings to the default values Image viewer allows you to access the Image viewer and the various
87. to the feature indicates secure credentials 3 Tap Install from device storage to install encrypted certificates from the USB Storage location 4 Tap Set password to set or change the credential storage password 5 Tap Clear credentials to clear the device SD card or phone memory of all certificate contents and reset the credentials password Language and Input Settings This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus You can also set on screen keyboard options W Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input Language Settings To set the language that the menus display on the phone 1 Press ay gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Language 2 Select a language and region from the list Select Input Method 1 Press Al gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default 2 Select an input method or Tap Configure input methods to alter modify the available input methods Swype Settings For more information refer to Enabling and Configuring SWYPE on page 88 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt E adjacent to the Swype field 2 Tap Select Input Method to switch between keyboard types Choose from either Samsung keypad or Swype 3 Tap How to Swype to view an on screen manual for Swype 4 Tap Personal Dictionary to access and manage your personal dictionary 5 Tap Preferences to alter these settings Aud
88. variety of time saving functions To activate motion 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Settings gt Motion gt Motion activation 2 Tap the desired on screen motion option In a single motion touch and slide the function s slider from off to the right to turn it on ou The following is a description some of the most commonly used gestures Tilt to zoom Once enabled you must be on a screen where content can be zoomed In a single motion touch and hold two points on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out Within the menu tap Sensitivity to adjust the slider and tap OK to store the new setting Pan to edit Once enabled allows you to move an on screen icon from one screen to another by simply holding it down then moving the device left or right You can also adjust the sensitivity of this detection Within the menu tap Sensitivity to adjust the slider and tap OK to store the new setting Double tap Once enabled double tap the top of the device to activate the Voice command functionality Turn over to mute Once enabled turn over the device screen down to incoming calls and currently playing sounds Menu Navigation You can tailor the device s range of functions to fit your needs using both menus and applications Menus sub menus and features are accessed by scrolling through the available on screen menus Your device defaults with seven screens Navigating
89. when the current call is minimized For more information referto Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 245 Displays your current battery charge level Icon shown is fully charged Displays when the current battery is 100 percent charged and the Display battery percentage option is enabled This icon is followed by an audible beep Displays your battery is currently charging Displays your current battery charge level is low Charge 28 15 Displays your current battery charge level is very low Charge 15 5 Hees Ses Shows your current battery only has up to 4 power remaining and will soon shutdown Charge 4 1 Displays when connected to the EDGE network Displays when your phone is communicating with the EDGE network Displays when connected to the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when your phone is communicating with the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when connected to the HSPA network Displays when your phone is communicating with the HSPA network Displays when the phone has detected an active USB connection and is in a USB Debugging mode Displays when there is a new text message E EIE E EI EI EJ Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to be delivered Displays when there is a new voicemail message Displays when there is a new visual voicemail message Displays in the not
90. win Calendar The Calendar displays four tabs Month displays the Month view Week displays the Week view Day displays the Day view List allows you to search for events for the selected Month Week or Day or you can look for events for a future date 2 Press and select one of the following options Create creates a new Event Go to displays a specific date Applications and Development 174 Today displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting the date Search allows you to search within current events Delete allows you to delete All events All events before today or an individual event Settings displays a list of configurable settings For more information refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 113 To manually sync calendar events 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Settings gt Accounts and sync 2 Locate the email account containing the events you wish to synchronize 3 Tap e within the adjacent account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 4 Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization of calendar events between your device and the remote exchange server A green checkmark indicates the feature is enabled 175 Camera Use your 8 0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG format The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an MP4 format Note A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take pictures or shoot vid
91. wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices Not all mobile devices have been rated Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on the box The ratings are not guarantees Results will vary depending on the user s hearing device and hearing loss If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference you may not be able to use a rated mobile device successfully Trying out the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs M Ratings Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled M4 is the better higher of the two ratings M ratings refer to enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode T Ratings Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled T4 is the better higher of the two ratings T ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode Hearing devices may also be rated Your hearing aid manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find this rating Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is
92. word that will be used in the Substitution field for example you fve Tap Done to save the substitution rule 4 Press to return to the previous screen Using the Google Voice Typing This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your spoken words into on screen text Configure Google Voice Typing 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default gt Google voice typing or From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom ofthe screen then select La Select input method gt Google voice typing The virtual keyboard is then removed and all subsequent input to done via the microphone as text to speech Select a language by tapping at the bottom of the Listening area Tap Add more languages to assign a new language via the Google voice typing menu Removing the check mark from the Automatic field allows you to select additional languages Entering Text 98 Using Google Voice Typing 1 From a screen where you can enter text a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select mm Select input method gt Google voice typing 2 Speak into the device s microphone and watch your text being entered on screen 3 If the text is incorrect tap DELETE 4 Once you have completed entering your message tap Done 99 Section 6 Contacts This sect
93. you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using this device you can tell the device that the phone is at different GPS locations In other words the phone is allowed to mock the coordinates 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap Allow mock locations to enable or disable the setting When enabled a check mark appears in the check box Desktop Backup Password Protect the desktop with a backup password ID 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap Desktop backup password 3 the Settings screen enter the current full backup password the new password for full backups then enter the new password again Changing Your Settings 272 4 Tap Set backup password to save the password change User Interface Options Configure the user interface by setting the behavior for the way the screen behaves when using applications or displaying data 1 Press options 2 Tap the check box next to each option to enable Strict mode enabled Makes the screen flash when applications perform long operations on the main thread Show pointer location Highlights the data that was touched on the screen Show touches Displays touch interactions on the screen Show screen updates Areas of the screen flash when they update Show CPU usage Screen highlights the current CPU usage Force GPU rendering Uses a 2D acceleration in applications Window animation sca
94. 1 Ina single motion touch and slide it in any direction to answer the new Incoming call 2 an option from the on screen menu Call Functions and Contacts List 82 Putting xxx on hold to place the previous caller on hold while you answer the new incoming call Ending call with xxx to end the previous call and answer the new call Note The new caller appears at the top of the list The previous caller is placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list 3 Tap Swap to switch between the two calls This places the new caller on hold and activates the previous call Important The currently active call is displayed with a green background 4 Tap Swap again to switch back 83 Call Log Tab The Call log tab is a list of the phone numbers or Contacts entries for calls you placed accepted or missed The Call log tab makes redialing a number fast and easy It is continually updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list The Notification area of the Home screen upper left displays phone notifications status or alerts such as Displays when a call is in progress Displays when a call was missed Accessing the Call log Tab 1 From the Home screen tap ay gt tab 2 Tap an entry to view available options STi Call log Note The Call log tab only records calls that occur while the phone is tu
95. 2 Using Voice Talk This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide 1 variety of functions on your phone 1 From the Home screen tap to Applications gt 2 2 Voice talk 2 Readthe on screen overview information and tap Next 3 to continue 3 Review the tutorial information and tap Next to 4 continue 5 4 Read the information on the What can say screen then tap Done 5 When the Voice talk windows displays you can either tap an on screen icon and follow the prompts or 6 Tap Tap amp Speak to say what you would like to do 73 Some commands include Call John Doe e Call John Doe mobile Text Katie Message Hey Play music Directions to XXX International Calls From the Home screen tap and then touch and hold until the device shows on screen Use the on screen keypad to enter the country code area code and phone number If you make a mistake tap E once to delete a single digit Touch and hold x f to delete all digits Tap mimi Pause Dialing You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with automated systems such as voicemail or financial phone numbers 2 Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after a two second pause This is indicated in the number string as a comma e Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Yes This is indicated in the number string as a semicolon 1 Fr
96. 2 code At the prompt enter a new PIN2 code Confirm your PIN2 code Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Managing the FDN List When this feature is enabled you can make calls only to phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt Additional settings Fixed Dialing Numbers 2 Tap Enable FDN 3 Atthe prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK FDN is enabled 4 Tap FDN list then press and then tap Add contact or edit the contacts that were stored Changing Your Settings 246 Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Voicemail You can view your voicemail number from this menu 1 Press and then tap Settings gt Call gt Voicemail service 2 Tap My carrier 3 Tap Voicemail gt Voicemail number to now view your number within the Voicemail number field Sound Settings From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well as configure the display settings Press and then tap Settings gt Sound
97. 5 seconds 30 Seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 10 minutes and 30 minutes Font style sets the fonts used on the LCD display Selections are Default font Choco cooky Helvetica S Rosemary or Get fonts online Tap Get fonts online to download additional fonts Display battery percentage to activate deactivate the display of battery charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of the screen Touch key light duration to adjust the light duration of the touch keys Auto adjust screen power adjusts the phone s LCD brightness level to automatically adjust and conserve battery power Gyroscope calibration uses the built in gyroscope to calibrate motion when the phone is in motion Adjusting Screen Brightness This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Display 2 Brightness Tap Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self adjust and tap OK or Touch and slide the on screen slider to adjust the level and tap OK Gyro Sensor Calibration Calibrate your phone by using the built in gyroscope 1 Press CN and then tap Settings gt Display Gyroscope calibration Place the phone on a level surface and tap Calibrate The phone adjusts the level of the accelerometer During the calibration process a green circle appears on screen and the center circle adjusts to the center position Changing Your Settings 250 Power Saving Mode This fea
98. 92 Photos Options 148 149 Sharing 148 149 Play Books 193 Play Music 193 Play Store 194 Pointer Speed Configuration 267 Polaris Office 197 Power Control 17 Power Saving Creating Custom 251 LCD Adjustment 250 System Default 251 338 Power Saving Mode 251 Activate 251 Additional Parameters 251 Power Savings 17 Predictive Text Using XT9 97 Predictive text Using XT9 96 Primary Shortcuts 38 Adding and Deleting 58 Customizing 58 Proximity Sensor Activation 244 Q Quick Dialing 67 Quick Messaging 120 R Recently used Applications Accessing 56 Redialing the last number 74 Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories 279 339 Reject Call Rejection Messages 243 Reject Calls Managing 71 Reject List Add To 72 Add to 85 Adding 107 Removing 107 Rejection List Assigning Multiple Numbers 71 Assigning Single Numbers 72 Rejection Messages 243 Reset 269 Reset Device 269 Responsible Listening 291 Restarting Device 19 Restore 268 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile device 297 Ringtone Phone 248 Volume 248 S SafeSearch 266 Samsung Account Creating 21 Set up 159 Samsung Keyboard XT9 Advanced Settings 264 Samsung Keypad 93 ABC Mode 95 Changing the Input Type 94 Enabling 93 Entering Symbols 95 Predictive Text 96 Settings 96 263 Symbol Numeric Mode 95 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 286 Save a Number From Keypad 103 Screen Home 37 Navigation 50 51 Screen Lock Set Up 258 Screen L
99. AY NOT APPLY TO YOU NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN OBTAINED BY PURCHASER FROM SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY 11 Limitation of Liability SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES Warranty Information 308 CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS OMISSIONS INTERRUPTIONS DEFECTS DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION COMPUTER VIRUS FAILURE TO CONNECT NETWORK CHARGES AND ALL OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NOT WITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING SAMSUNG S TOTAL LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES DAMAGES CAUSES OF ACTION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF PURCHASER S USE OF THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS EXCLUSIONS AND DISCLAIMERS
100. After a character is entered the cursor automatically advances to the next space Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keypad 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap 59 to configure the keyboard for ABC mode Once in this mode the text input type shows 8 Note After typing an initial uppercase character the changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case 3 Enter your text using the on screen keyboard f you make a mistake tap to erase a single character Touch and hold to erase an entire word 4 Send to send the message 95 Using SymbollNumeric Mode Use the Symbol Numeric Mode to add numbers symbols or emoticons While in this mode the text mode key displays 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard Rotate the phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation if desired 2 to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode Once in this mode the text input type shows ABC 3 Tap a number symbol or emoticon character 4 1 9 to return to ABC mode To enter symbols 1 to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode 2 Tapthe appropriate symbol key or Tap button to cycle through additional pages e The first number on this key indicates which page 1 2 or 3 of additional characters is active Using XT9 P
101. Android is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline For more information refer to Polaris Office on page 197 a Pro Apps V Provides access to compatible productivity tools For more information refer to Pro Apps on page 197 Search Provides an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google Settings O Accesses the device s built in Settings menu For more information refer to Changing Your Settings on page 232 gm Slacker Slacker offers free internet radio for mobile phones For more information refer to Slacker on page 198 Social Hub Allows you to easily and intuitively satisfy all of your communication needs from within a single user interface E mails instant messaging social network contents and calendar contents from all major service providers are available For more information refer to Social Hub on page 198 T Mobile Name ID Allows you to modify the on screen Caller ID information T Mobile TV Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your phone This application is a subscription service For more information refer to T Mobile TV on page 199 3 T Mobile Video Chat Allows you to record and share live videos on your device with your friends family and your favorite social networks For more information refer to T Mobile Video Chat on page 202
102. Chat This is a mobile video sharing and 2 way video calling service This application also lets you record and share experiences with your friends family and your favorite social networks 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt T Mobile Video Chat gt Sign up Fill in the Email address Username and Password then tap Sign up to create your new account Follow the on screen instructions For more information visit http gik com To adjust application settings 1 Press and then tap Settings 2 Choose from any of the following options Sharing allows you to setup sharing preferences Facebook set up your Qik credentials for Facebook posting of videos Twitter set up your Twitter account sharing preferences YouTube set up your Qik credentials for YouTube posting of videos People set up your contact sharing parameters Privacy allows you to select who can find you and see your videos M2M Settings allows you to configure the Mobile to Mobile video chat settings Location allows you to select the level of location accuracy that is embedded into your Qik videos When posting or sharing Qik video information with others you can decide how accurate the related location information can be Choose from Off City level Street level or Track live Video encoding quality allows you to assign a video quality the outbound video Choose from Low Normal or Hig
103. Confirm the Mobile AP service icon 8 appears at the top of the screen Note By default the connection is open and not secured It is recommended that you access the Mobile HotSpot settings and create a secure connection by using a password for communication Note Using your 4G service and Mobile HotSpot drains your device s battery at a much faster rate than when using any other feature combination The best way to keep using the device as a HotSpot is to have it connected to a power supply To connect to the HotSpot 1 Enable Wi Fi wireless functionality on your target device laptop media device etc 2 Scan for Wi Fi networks from the external device and select your device s Mobile HotSpot name from the network list e The SSID name for your device s HotSpot is determined by what you entered into the Network SSID field You can change the name by pressing then tapping Configure gt Network SSID and changing the entry 3 Select this HotSpot and follow your on screen instructions to complete the connection 4 Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet connection To secure the Portable HotSpot service The two most common methods for securing your connection to the HotSpot are to a security method WPA2 PSK and to Hide your phone s SSID name 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt More gt USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot 2 Press and then tap Configure
104. Control shortcut is added to the current screen Tap any of the icons on the Power Savings shortcut bar to activate deactivate the feature A green bar displayed beneath the icon means the application is active turned on The green bar is removed from beneath the icon when the feature is deactivated turned off Initial Device Configuration 1 Select a language from the associated field English is the default language Tap Start Select the Automatic date and time field to let the network update this information 4 Tap Next Choose to either Sign in to your existing Google account Get an account by creating a new one or Not now to continue Once you log in to your account if prompted to enable purchases enter your credit card information and click Save or Click Skip to continue without entering this information Select deselect the desired Google location services and tap Next If prompted select your Backup and Restore settings by placing a check mark alongside the associated field and tap Next Enter a First and Last name then tap Next This will help to identify this as your device 9 Read and agree to the Google services notice by tapping Next 10 Tap Finish to complete the setup process 11 Read the on screen System Manager Application information Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device
105. DISCLAIMER PROPER USE OF A AMERICA USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR TOUCH SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION Display Touch Screen Please note the following information when using your mobile device WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it receives significant impact Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you If your mobile device has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information please refer to the Standard Limited Warranty GPS amp AGPS Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning System GPS signal for location based applications A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U S Government that are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan FRP Changes may affect the performance of location based technology on your mobile device Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global Positio
106. ERTY keyboards 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt adjacent to the Samsung keypad field or From within an active text entry screen tap B from the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keypad settings screen Tap the XT9 field A check mark indicates activation Tap the XT9 advanced settings and configure any of the following advanced options Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to complete the word you have started A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered before a word prediction is made Choose from 2 letters 3 letters 4 letters or 5 letters Changing Your Settings 264 265 Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the characters of the keys you touched and those of nearby characters A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Auto append automatically adds predictions to the word you are typing A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Auto substitution allows the device to automatically replace misspelled or miskeyed words This option reduce typos A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Regional correction
107. Facebook account under her maiden and married name as well as a Video chat account when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her entries and view the information in one record Joining contact information makes sending messages easy You can select any account email address or information all from one screen versus searching multiple individual screens to locate the desired account information Contacts 108 Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts any updates contacts make to email account names email addresses etc automatically update in your contacts list 1 2 From the Home screen tap i Tap a contact name the name you want to link to another entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information Press and then tap Join contact Tap the second contact entry the entry in which to link The second contact is now linked with the first and the account information is merged into one screen Note The information is still maintained in both entries but displays in one record for easier viewing when you link the contacts 109 Important It is the second contact image that is displayed for both but the first contact s name that is used For example If Amy original entry is joined with Julie second entry Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains Tap the Amy entry
108. G SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY Samsung Telecommunications America STA LLC Headquarters 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson TX 75082 Customer Care Center 1000 Klein Rd Plano TX 75074 Toll Free Tel 1 888 987 HELP 4357 Internet Address http www samsung com 92012 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device For 24 hour information and assistance we offer a new FAQ ARS System Automated Response System at www samsung com us support Nuance VSuite T9 Text Input and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications Inc or its affiliates in the United States and or other countries ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co Ltd in Japan and other countries The Bluetooth word mark figure mark stylized B Design and combination mark Bluetooth word mark and B Design are registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG microSD and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association Openwave Google the Google logo Android the Android logo Google Play Gmail Google Mail Google Maps Google Music Google Talk Picasa YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc Wi Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Allian
109. Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone For more information referto Using Google Mail on page 138 Google This application makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier You can set up Circles of friends visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google For more information refer to Google on page 141 Ki Allows you to send and receive instant messages using Windows Live Messenger Google Talk or Yahoo Messenger communities For more information refer to Using Instant Messaging IM on page 141 Kies air Allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone as long as both are on the same Wi Fi network You can now have real time access of your phone through your PC to view call logs videos photos bookmarks IMs and even send SMS messages directly from your home computer For more information refer to Kies Air on page 220 Latitude Lets you see your friends locations and share yours with them The application also lets you see your friends locations on a map or in a list It also lets you sendinstant messages and emails make phone calls and get directions to your friends locations For more information refer to Latitude on page 178 Lookout Lookout provides mobile d
110. IMITED EXTENT THE TERMS MUST BE READ SUBJECT TO THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS IF THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS APPLY TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH SAMSUNG IS ABLE TO DO SO SAMSUNG LIMITS ITS LIABILITY UNDER THOSE PROVISIONS TO AT ITS OPTION IN THE CASE OF SERVICES A THE SUPPLYING OF THE SERVICES AGAIN OR B THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE SERVICES SUPPLIED AGAIN AND IN THE CASE OF GOODS A THE REPLACEMENT OF THE GOODS OR THE SUPPLY OF EQUIVALENT GOODS B THE REPAIR OF THE GOODS C THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF REPLACING THE GOODS OR OF ACQUIRING EQUIVALENT GOODS OR D THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE GOODS REPAIRED Warranty Information 316 Indemnification You agree to defend indemnify and hold harmless Samsung from and against any and all third party claims and all liabilities assessments losses costs or damages resulting from or arising out of i your breach of the Terms ii your infringement or violation of any intellectual property other rights or privacy of a third party iii misuse of the Service by a third party where such misuse was made possible due to your failure to take reasonable measures to protect your username and password against misuse Choice of Law Except where prohibited by applicable law or provided otherwise herein the Terms shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York without regard to its conflict of law provisions You and Samsung agree to submit to the non exclusive jurisdicti
111. If you send us an e mail with questions or comments we may use your personal information to respond to your questions or comments and we may save your questions or comments for future reference Aside from our reply to such an e mail it is not our standard practice to send you e mail unless you request a particular service that involves e mail communications However you consent to us contacting you by e mail and sending you information about products and services which we believe may be of interest to you You may have the opportunity to subscribe to an electronic newsletter in which case information about the Service or our advertisers will be sent to your e mail address We will provide you with the option to change your preferences and opt out of receiving those communications You may request at any time that we not e mail you in future by clicking the unsubscribe link which is included at the bottom of any e mail that you receive from us If you unsubscribe we will make reasonable efforts to discontinue e mail communications to you as soon as practicable DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THIRD PARTIES Aggregate Information Except as specifically set forth in this Privacy Policy we do not share your personal information with any third party without your permission We may disclose aggregate information such as demographic information and our statistical analyses to third parties including advertisers or other business partners
112. LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR WITHOUT LIMITATION COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT LOSS OF USE TIME DATA REPUTATION OPPORTUNITY GOODWILL PROFITS OR SAVINGS INCONVENIENCE INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE AS TO THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT Nothing in the Product instructions or information
113. Program will provide Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label Just go to http www samsung com us aboutsamsung citizenship usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect html INT ST recyle your phone page and follow the instructions to print out a free pre paid postage label and then send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed via U S Mail for recycling Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler To find the nearest recycling location go to our website www samsung com recyclingdirect Or call 877 278 0799 287 Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices and batteries Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with local regulations In some areas the disposal of these items in household or business trash may be prohibited Help us protect the environment recycle Warning Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode UL Certified Travel Charger The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety requirements Please adhere to the following safety instructions per UL guidelines FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH WARRANTY
114. R IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON INFRINGEMENT OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS MADE IN RELATION TO THE AVAILABILITY ACCURACY RELIABILITY OF THE SERVICE INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION OR CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SERVICE YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE AND ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT YOU MAY BE EXPOSED TO CONTENT FROM VARIOUS SOURCES SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY THIRD PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICE THAT MAY BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE SERVICE NOR SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR MALICIOUS CODE CONTAINED ON OR DISTRIBUTED THROUGH BY THIRD PARTIES YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES LOSSES COSTS OR HARM ARISING FROM YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SERVICE TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW EXCEPT FOR LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR INTENTIONAL MISCONDUCT SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITIES WITH RESPECT TO YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE INCLUDING DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IF THERE IS A CLAIM THAT WE HAVE BREACHED ANY OF THE PROVISIONS IN THE TERMS THIS DOES NOT AFFECT OR INVALIDATE THE OTHER PROVISIONS CERTAIN STATUTORY PROVISIONS UNDER APPLICABLE LAW MAY IMPLY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR IMPOSE OBLIGATIONS UPON SAMSUNG WHICH CANNOT BE EXCLUDED RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED OR CANNOT BE EXCLUDED RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED EXCEPT TO A L
115. Report You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that will display on all Home screens If you add an application as a primary shortcut the application icon will not be displayed in the Applications menu For more information refer to Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts on page 58 Applications and Development 172 AllShare This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile phone with your TV streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real time on screen monitoring Samsung s AllShare makes staying connected easy Allows users to share their in device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified Digital Living Network Alliance Devices These external devices must also be DLNA compliant Wi Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer Important You must activate Wi Fi to use this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 232 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt AllShare 2 Follow the on screen prompts For more information refer to AllShare on page 169 173 Asphalt 6 Provides access to a built in HD video game 1 From the Home screen tap Ld Applications gt Asphalt 6 2 Follow the on screen prompts Blio eBooks T Mobile This is an eReading application that presents eBooks just like the printed version in full color and with all of
116. SAMSUNG BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY PARTY RELATED TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER FRAUD MISREPRESENTATION BREACH OF CONTRACT NEGILIGENCE PERSONAL INJURY PRODUCTS LIABILITY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT OR ANY OTHER THEORY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS MEANS THAT YOU WILL NOT SEEK AND HEREBY WAIVE ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL TREBLE OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES FROM SAMSUNG THIS LIMITATION AND WAIVER ALSO APPLIES TO ANY CLAIMS YOU MAY BRING AGAINST ANY OTHER PARTY TO THE EXTENT THAT SAMSUNG WOULD BE REQUIRED TO INDEMNIFY THAT PARTY FOR SUCH CLAIM 6 5 You acknowledge that the above provisions of this clause 6 are reasonable for the Software and you will accept such risk and or insure accordingly 6 6 Any rights that you have as a consumer are not affected by this clause 6 7 TERM AND TERMINATION 7 1 This License shall commence upon the earlier of your acceptance of this License or your activation of the Software and shall continue until terminated in accordance with clause 7 2 or otherwise in accordance with this License 7 2 This License will terminate automatically if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License or if you ceas
117. SYM mode the text mode key shows 1 Froma screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap ha to configure the keyboard for SYM mode Once in this mode the text input type shows 3 the on screen key for the number symbol you want to enter 4 Touch and hold an on screen key to enter the secondary symbol above the main one on the same key 5 Tap to choose from additional symbols For example T5 To enter amp tap ES and select the amp key To enter tap Wi and then touch and hold the amp key Entering Text 92 Using the Samsung Keypad This QWERTY keypad can be used to enter text in either a Portrait or landscape orientation The only difference between the two orientations are the sizes of the keys From a screen where you enter text rotate your phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation The on screen QWERTY keypad displays Hi there have new pho 93 The Samsung Keypad This device has a built in QWERTY keypad portrait mode or keyboard landscape mode Using the QWERTY keypad keyboard you can type letter numbers punctuation and other characters To use the Samsung keypad you must first configure the settings to default to the Samsung keypad 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default gt Samsung keypad sors From a screen where you can enter text in a sing
118. T EXTENT PERMISSIBLE IN LAW ALL CONDITIONS WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE AND STIPULATIONS EXPRESS OTHER THAN THOSE SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE OR IMPLIED STATUTORY CUSTOMARY OR OTHERWISE WHICH BUT FOR SUCH EXCLUSION WOULD OR MIGHT SUBSIST IN FAVOUR OF YOU EXCEPT AS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE 6 3 SUBJECT TO CLAUSE 6 1 LICENSOR WILL BE UNDER NO LIABILITY TO YOU WHATSOEVER WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE BREACH OF STATUTORY DUTY RESTITUTION OR OTHERWISE FOR ANY INJURY DEATH DAMAGE OR DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS ALL THREE OF WHICH TERMS INCLUDE WITHOUT LIMITATION PURE ECONOMIC LOSS LOSS OF PROFITS 325 LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF SAVINGS DEPLETION OF GOODWILL AND LIKE LOSS HOWSOEVER CAUSED ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH 6 3 1 THE SOFTWARE OR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OR SUPPLY OR FAILURE OR DELAY IN SUPPLY OF THE SOFTWARE BY LICENSOR OR ON THE PART OF LICENSOR S EMPLOYEES AGENTS OR SUB CONTRACTORS 6 3 2 ANY BREACH BY LICENSOR OF ANY OF THE EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TERMS OF THIS LICENSE 6 3 3 ANY USE MADE OF THE SOFTWARE OR 6 3 4 ANY STATEMENT MADE OR NOT MADE OR ADVICE GIVEN OR NOT GIVEN BY OR ON BEHALF OF LICENSOR 6 4 Disclaimer of Certain Damages IN NO EVENT SHALL
119. This aggregate information does not include your personal information Service Providers We sometimes engage unaffiliated businesses to assist us in providing you certain services For example we may use third parties to provide advertising marketing and promotional assistance provide e mail services or facilitate our online services In those instances we may need to share your personal information with them We require these companies to use your personal information only to provide the particular product or service and do not authorize them to use your personal information for any other reason We sometimes offer promotions in conjunction with a third party sponsor If you choose to participate in those promotions we may share your information with the sponsor if they need it to send you a product or other special promotion they offer Third Party Advertisers We may use third party advertising companies to deliver specific advertisements to you These companies may collect non personal information about your visits to Social Hub in order to provide advertisements about products and services that may be of interest to you These companies may also aggregate your non personal information for use in targeted advertising marketing research and other similar purposes These companies may place their own cookies on your computer If you want to prevent a third party advertiser from collecting and using this information you may vi
120. UNG s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Product s sale condition or performance You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product To opt out you must send notice by e mail to optout sta samsung com with the subject line Arbitration Opt Out You must include in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the Product was purchased c the Product model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found i on the Product box ii on the Product information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the back of the Product beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warrant
121. When used in conjunction with Android Beam your device can be used to beam application content when NFC capable devices are touched 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt More 2 Tap the NFC field A check mark displayed next to the feature indicating it is enabled Note Enabling NFC also enables Android Beam 239 and then tap Settings gt More gt Android Beam This feature when activated via NFC allows you to directly beam application content to another NFC capable device when they are in direct contact These files are typically small such as Calendar and Contact entries 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt More 2 Verify the NFC feature is active 3 Tap Android Beam and make sure the feature is turned on 4 If not already active in a single motion touch and slide the Android Beam slider to the right to turn it on 5 Complete the transfer process between the two NFC enabled devices by placing them back to back Wi Fi Direct Setup and Settings You can configure your device to connect directly with other Wi Fi capable devices This is an easy way to transfer data between devices These devices must be enabled for Wi Fi direct communication This connection is direct and not via a HotSpot or WAP Note Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi Fi network connection To give your Wi Fi Direct connection a unique name It can be difficult to pair to external devices if
122. a network connection Note Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Default Setup Options Your phone default is set to Automatic to automatically search for an available network You can set this option to Manual to select a network each time you connect 1 Press and then tap Settings gt gt Mobile networks gt Network operators 2 Tap Default setup Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually or Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a network 243 Call Settings To access the Call settings menu m Press fay and then tap Settings gt Call or From the Home screen tap gt Settings gt Call Configuring General Call Settings Configure the general call settings using this option 1 From the Home screen tap Settings gt Call 2 Tap one of the following options Call rejection allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection list Auto reject mode sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or messages Auto reject list provides access to current rejection entries and numbers Set reject messages allows you to manage both existing rejection messages and create new ones Call alert allows you to assign call alert tones and activate call alerts and vibration Answer vibration vibrates the phone when the called party answers Call status tones assigns sounds settings durin
123. accidentally deleted Forward allows you to forward the currently selected message bubble to an external recipient Copy to SIM copies the currently selected message bubble as a single text message within the SIM card 125 View message details displays details for the currently selected message bubble Deleting Messages Deleting a single message thread 1 From the Home screen tap EJ 2 Touch and hold a message from the Messages list then select Delete thread 3 Atthe prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting multiple message threads 1 From the Home screen tap E 2 Press and then tap Delete threads 3 Tap each message thread you want to delete A checkmark displays beside each selected message 4 Tap Delete 5 Atthe prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the process Deleting a single message bubble 1 From the Home screen tap E 2 Open a message to reveal the message string 3 Touch and hold a message bubble then select Delete message 4 Atthe prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting multiple message bubbles 1 From the Home screen tap EJ 2 Open a message to reveal the message string 3 Press and then tap Delete messages 4 Place a check mark on the individual bubbles targeted for deletion or choose Select all 5 Tap Delete to erase or Cancel to exit Message Search You can search through your messages by using the Message Search feature 1 From the Home screen tap 2
124. ack up and Reset Location settings backup configurations or reset the phone to erase all personal data m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset Mobile Backup and Restore The device can be configured to back up your current settings application data and settings 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current phone settings and applications Tap Back account to assign the account being backed up Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re installation of a previously installed application including preferences and data Tap Factory data reset to reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings For more information refer to Factory Data Reset on page 269 Tap Collect diagnostics to collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting use For more information refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 269 Prior to doing a Factory Reset Before initiating a factory reset it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use To export a Contact list to your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap B Contacts 2 Press and then tap Import Export 3 Tap Export to SD card gt OK For more information refer to Export Import on page 116 Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap La Applications gt Gallery 2 Verify the Gallery contains all of you
125. act information or other items using a Bluetooth connection Note Prior to using this feature Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your phone and the external device and the recipient s device must be visible 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible 2 From the Home screen tap B Contacts 3 Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on screen context menu 4 Tap Send namecard via gt Bluetooth and select a paired external Bluetooth device Note The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for the pairing to be successful 5 ABluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list Enable Downloading for Web Applications Important Before you can download a web application you must insert an SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading For more information refer to Installing the microSD Memory Card on page 12 Also see Mounting the SD Card on page 64 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security gt Unknown sources check box Connections 218 2 Tap OK to allow install of non Play Store applications Tap again to remove the check mark and disable the installation of non market applications Warning Not all web applications are safe to download In order to protect your phone and data use Play Store to install web applications For more information refer to Downloading a New Google Application
126. and My Media More Info Browse or Live Channels YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt YouTube 2 When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing posted videos 3 Press gt Settings gt General gt High quality on mobile if you prefer high quality output Section 9 Applications and Development This section contains a description of each application that is Applications available in the Applications Menu its function and how to navigate through that particular application If the application is already described in another section of this user manual The Applications list provides quick access to all the available applications on the phone then a cross reference to that particular section is provided 411 amp More Provides more than just single tap access to directory Tip To open applications quickly add the icons of frequently assistance and other portals Available categories include used applications to one of the Home screens For more 411 Directory Assistance Current Weather and more information refer to Customizing the Screens on 1 From the Home screen tap to Applications gt page 56 P t1 amp More 2 Tap an on screen option and follow the on screen prompts Choices include 411 Directory Assistance Current Weather Horoscopes and Sports
127. any interruption or suspension of any third party content or service In addition Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to third party sites Any question or request for service relating to third party sites should be made directly to the relevant site operator Subscription Information Use of the Service may involve transmission of data through your service provider s network Your network service provider may charge you for such data transmission Samsung assumes no responsibility for the payment of any such charges Availability The Service may be network dependent contact your network service provider for more information Samsung reserves the right in its sole discretion to change improve and correct the Service The Service may not be available during maintenance breaks and other times Samsung may also decide to discontinue the Service or any part thereof in its sole discretion In such case you will be provided with prior notification Samsung does not represent or warrant that the Service or any part thereof is appropriate or available for use in any particular jurisdiction If you choose to access the Service you do so on you own initiative and at you own risk and you are responsible for complying with all US federal state and local laws rules and regulations Dealings with Others You may interact with other users on or through the Service You agree that any such interactions do n
128. arantee the security of our databases nor can we guarantee that information you supply won t be intercepted while being transmitted to us over the Internet CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC AREAS Our third party service and content providers may offer chat user reviews bulletin boards or other public functions and any posting by you is considered public information available to other users Any posting is governed in accordance with the third party service and content providers terms and conditions You should take care not to use personal information in your screen name or other information that might be publicly available to other users Archived Information We maintain archives of web logs database and other systems and information in relation to the Service Please note that it is possible some of this information may remain archived after we delete the information from its active database We maintain archives for disaster recovery legal and other non marketing purposes How can I update my profile You can help us maintain the accuracy of your profile by notifying us when you change zip postal code country of residence age range or e mail address If at any time you wish to update your information or stop receiving communication from us sign in to the Service and then select update your profile to change your preferences CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES Registration may be required to enter promotions such as contes
129. arch for a destination address place name of business or even a type of business Layers allows you to switch map views See previous description Help provides on screen help Settings provides access to both Power settings Screen dimming and Information Terms privacy amp notices Applications and Development 190 Netflix Netflix is a service offering online streaming service that allows you to watch TV Shows amp Movies directly on your phone Note Before being able to use the application you must first have an active Netflix account containing the movie streaming option 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Netflix If prompted to update follow the on screen prompts 2 Enter the Email and Password associated with your current Netflix account 3 Follow the on screen prompts to use the application Note It is recommended that this service be used in conjunction with an active Wi Fi connection 191 News amp Weather The News amp Weather application allows you to view the news and weather in your area 1 From the Home screen tap News amp Weather 2 Select from any of the available tabs WEATHER TOP STORIES U S SPORTS and ENTERTAINMENT 3 Tap the temperature to display a graph mapping the days temperature and humidity 4 While on the Weather screen press to display the following options Refresh allows you to refresh the screen Your location and the weather i
130. aring loss and potential hearing problem varies Additionally the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound the device settings and the headphones that are used As a result there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound settings and equipment You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing When using headphones turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment use noise cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise By blocking background environment noise noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using earbuds Limit the amount of time you listen As the volume increases less time is required before you hearing could be affected Avoid using headphones after exposure to ex
131. as your current activity billing information plan services downloads and other information Note Wi Fi connection must be disabled prior to use this application requires use of a T Mobile network connection 1 From the Home screen tap La Applications gt 4 My Account 2 Scroll to the bottom of the application screen and select one of three available options Home return to the application Home screen My Account provides access to account specific features such as Current Activity Bill Summary Plans amp Services etc Help displays on screen help information related to this application Navigation Google Maps Navigation Beta is an internet connected turn by turn GPS navigation system with voice guidance Caution Traffic data is not real time and directions may be wrong dangerous prohibited or involve ferries Important To receive better GPS signals avoid using your device in the following conditions inside a building or between buildings in a tunnel or underground passage in poor weather around high voltage or electromagnetic fields in a vehicle with tinted windows 1 From the Home screen tap La Applications gt Navigation 2 Read the on screen disclaimer regarding the current release status of the Navigation app and tap Accept Applications and Development 188 Enabling GPS Location 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Google loc
132. ask Manger Overview m From the Home screen tap tg Applications gt Task manager Press and hold CN then tap Task manager This screen contains the following tabs Active applications display those currently active applications running on your phone e Downloaded displays any instal led packages or applications from the Play Store that are taking up memory space Tap Uninstall to remove them from your phone RAM which displays the amoun Access Memory currently being Memory Storage displays a visual graph t of current RAM Random used and allow you to Clear indicating the available and used space within the System storage USB storage and external SD card Help provides additional battery saving techniques Getting Started 24 Shutting Down an Currently Active Application 1 From the Home screen tap Task manager 2 From the Active applications tab tap Exit to close selected applications or Tap Exit all to close all background running applications 25 Section 2 Understanding Your Device This section outlines key features of your phone It also describes the device s keys screen and the icons that display when the device is in use Features of Your Device Your device is lightweight easy to use and offers many significant features The following list outlines a few of the features included in your device Touch screen with virtual on screen QWERTY keyboa
133. ation services allows apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location 3 Tap GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite Tip When using Google Maps you can turn on Location and Google search Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of interest at the street level However this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power Navigation options 1 189 From the Home screen tap Applications gt A Navigation The navigation application can be configured from the main screen If prompted read the on screen disclaimer and tap Accept Choose from the following on screen options Driving Walking B to configure the method of travel Selection of Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and obstructions Driving mode enables the Settings feature allows you to configure your Route options such as Avoid highways or Avoid tolls Maps ri enables the on screen real time map functionality Speak Destination allows you to use the voice recognition feature to search for matching locations in your area Type Destination allows you to manually enter a destination address via the on screen keypad e Contacts allows you to receive turn by turn directions to the address stored for a selected Contacts entry Starred places allows you to obtain directions to locations that have been starred wit
134. atures Note Selecting Location consent may drain battery power For more information refer to Power Saving Mode on page 251 3 to exit this calling mode End Call Call Functions and Contacts List 68 Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency number a 1 tap process Before you can resume normal calling operations you should first exit this mode 1 Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device r 2 Press Ol and then tap isi 3 Enter the emergency number ex 911 and then tap mim 4 Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features After completing your emergency call appears in the Notification area until you exit the Emergency calling mode Note This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly than a normal calling mode 5 Atthe Emergency Callback screen Tap to callback 911 with a single tap Touch and slide to the right to exit this mode 69 Touch and slide to the left return to the Home screen This allows access other applications while staying in this mode Dialing Options When you enter numbers on the Keypad you will see three on screen options From the keypad screen use one of the following options Call to call the entered number Delete e to delete digits from the current number Voice Mail sop to access your Voice
135. background applications These are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still active but minimized The Task Manager notonly lets you see which of these applications are still active in the background butalso easily lets you choose which applications are left running and which are closed Shutting Down Applications From the Home screen tap Task manager Applications gt Press and hold CN then tap Task Manager This screen contains the following tabs Active applications display those currently active applications running on your phone Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from the Play Store that are taking up memory space Tap Uninstall to remove them from your phone RAM displays the amount of current RAM Random Access Memory currently being used and allow you to Clear memory From the Task list screen tap a task once you have completed it and a checkmark appears next to the task The task name is also grayed out so that you can still read it Applications and Development 200 Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space within the System storage location USB storage SD card location and Battery monitor Help provides additional battery saving techniques 7 From the Active applications tab tap Exit to close selected applications or tap Exit all to close all background running applications TeleNav GPS TeleNav GPS Navigato
136. battery that is damaged in any way Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects Accidental short circuiting can occur when a metallic object coin key jewelry clip or pen causes a direct connection between the and terminals of the battery metal strips on the battery for example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag Short circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the object causing the short circuiting Important Use only Samsung approved batteries and recharge your battery only with Samsung approved chargers which are specifically designed for your phone WARNING Use of a non Samsung approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire explosion leakage or other hazard Samsung s warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused by non Samsung approved batteries and or chargers Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers Some websites and second hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers and carriers might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier recommended products and accessories If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger Misuse or use of incompatible phones batteries and charging devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire explosion or leakage leading to s
137. be interesting for you to read Hot Trends provides an on screen list of today s hot trends on movies music etc Weather displays current Weather information These entries can be edit and configured Headlines displays current headline information These entries can be edit and configured Directory provides access to additional directory service from What s New Email IM Facebook Social Chat Cnn News Weather and Entertainment Navigating with the Browser 1 To select an item tap an entry 2 To scroll through a website sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down motion 3 return to the previous page press Browser Options 1 From the top of the browser screen select one of the two available options Bookmarks provides access to the Bookmarks screen Windows displays a list of the windows you have open or From the home page press to access the following options Refresh reloads the current page Forward forwards the browser to another web page Add bookmark allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list e Share page allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a message Find on page allows you to search in the current page Desktop view allows you to assign the browser to display the current page in the desktop view to closely mimic the display as it would appear on a Desktop computer Save for offline reading allows you to store the current page in memory
138. bient light level to adjust the screen brightness contrast This sensor decreases screen brightness in dim light n a bright light condition outdoors the sensors cause the device to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing n dim light conditions the device increases the screen brightness to compensate Back View The following illustration shows the external elements of your device 1 External speaker allows you to hear ringers music and other sounds offered by your phone 2 Flash is used to take photos in low light conditions Camera lens is used to take photos Device Display Your display provides information about the device s status and is the interface to manage features It indicates your connection status signal strength battery status and time Icons display at the top of the device when an incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a specified time when an alarm was set Signal strength Battery status Time Connection Status Status Bar Notification Soda area oogle searc Status Home Screen area Shortcuts Primary Shortcuts The screen also displays notifications and Application or shortcut bar with four primary shortcuts Phone Contacts Messaging and Applications Display settings In this menu you can change various settings for the for the wallpaper cube brightness or backlight m From the Home screen tap Applications gt Setti
139. bile device in a microwave oven Doing so may cause a fire or explosion Dust and dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust dirt or sand Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh chemicals cleaning solvents or strong detergents to clean the mobile device Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap and water solution Shock or vibration Do not drop knock or shake the mobile device Rough handling can break internal circuit boards Paint Do not paint the mobile device Paint can clog the device s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation Responsible Listening Caution Avoid potential hearing loss 291 Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations Prolonged exposure to loud sounds including music is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices such as portable music players and cell phones at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise induced hearing loss This includes the use of headphones including headsets earbuds and Bluetooth or other wireless devices Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus a ringing in the ear hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing Individual susceptibility to noise induced he
140. binding upon the parties 14 ENTIRE AGREEMENT SEVERABILITY This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA If any provision of this EULA is held to be void invalid unenforceable or illegal the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect Social Hub Legal Terms and Privacy Samsung s Social Hub and if applicable the website where you accessed this Disclaimer collectively the Service is being made available to you by Samsung Electronics Co Ltd and its affiliates and suppliers collectively Samsung subject to the following enclosed documents Social Hub Terms and Conditions which governs your use of the Service generally Social Hub End User License Agreement which specifically governs your use of the software which forms part of or enables you to access the Service and Social Hub Privacy Policy which governs our collection and use of personal information in connection with your access to and use of the Service By using the Service you agree to be bound by the above documents Please read through those documents to make sure you understand the basis on which Samsung is providing the Service to you You will be able to access additional features available at socialhub samsungmobile
141. c and data between SD compatible devices This section addresses the features and options of your device s SD functionality The device has a USB SD card mode microSD card storage up to 2GB in size SDHC card storage up to 32GB in size Using the SD Card There are several methods for using the SD card 1 Connecting to your PC to store files such as music videos or other types of files and media 2 To activate the camera video music player and other dependant media or applications Important Your device can support SDHC cards up to 32GB capacity 63 SD card Overview After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your computer to access and manage the SD card Important If access to the external SD card is not available download and install the USB drivers microSD Icon Indicators The following icons show your microSD card connection status at a glance the contents of the microSD card are being scanned the card is being prepared for use and for mounting the card has been improperly removed _ 2 Verify the card is properly mounted Important DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is y propery accessing or transferring files Doing so will result Note Your device is configured to be used as a mass storage in loss or damage of data Make sure your battery media device by default If it does not respond properly is fully charged before using the
142. can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time To add a new window 1 From your browser window tap Windows gt New window 2 Anew browser window displays Note The number of currently open windows is displayed at the bottom of the WIndows screen 3 Scroll across the screen to view the currently active windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet window To delete an existing window 1 From your browser window tap Windows 2 Scroll across the available windows and locate your target window 3 Tap S next to the listing to delete the window Going Incognito The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites outside of the normal browsing Pages viewed in this incognito window won t appear within your browser history or search history and no traces such as cookies are left on your device Note Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your device after you exit the incognito mode To add a new incognito window 1 From your browser window tap Windows gt E3 Incognito 2 Anew browser window displays Note The incognito icon appears in the upper left of the new browser window while you are in this mode To exit from the incognito window 1 From your browser window tap Windows gt New window 2 Scroll across the available windows and locate the incognito window 3 Tap O next to the incognito listing to delete this window Using Bookmark
143. cation may contain inaccurate or incomplete data and circumstances can and do change over time In some areas complete information may not be available Therefore you should always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them All users should pay attention to road conditions closures traffic and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking Always obey posted road signs Emergency Calls This mobile device like any wireless mobile device operates using radio signals wireless and landline networks as well as user programmed functions which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions areas or circumstances Therefore you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential communications medical emergencies for example Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas plan an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel Remember to make or receive any calls the mobile device must be switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device networks or when certain network services and or mobile device features are in use Check with local service providers To make an emergency call 1 If the mobile device is not on switch it on 2 From the Home screen tap Im 3 Key in the emergency number for your present location for example 911
144. ce Inc Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype Inc 2010 Swype Inc All rights reserved is a registered Trademark of Openwave Inc DIVX DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p including premium content ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX is a digital video format created by DivX LLC a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video Visit www divx com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video on Demand VOD movies To obtain your registration code locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu tap Applications gt Settings gt About phone gt Legal information gt License settings gt DivX amp VOD gt Register Go to vod divx com for more information on how to complete your registration Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise intermittent sounds like a siren or nearby conversation and echoes allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere How Does It Work Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system the technology Captures evalua
145. ce or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information refer to Standard Limited Warranty on page 300 Low Battery Indicator When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time remain 15 charge a warning tone sounds and the Battery low message repeats at regular intervals on the display In this condition your device conserves its remaining battery power by dimming the backlight When the battery level becomes too low the device automatically turns off The on screen battery charge is represented by default as a colored battery icon You can also choose to display a percentage value Having a percentage value on screen can provide a better idea of the remaining charge on the battery m Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Display gt Display battery percentage For more information refer to Display Settings on page 249 Extending Your Battery Life Active applications light levels Bluetooth usage and GPS functionality all act to drain your battery The following is a list of helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power Reduce your backlight on time Turn Bluetooth off when not in use Turn Wi Fi off when not in use Deactivate the GPS when not needed Most applications using this function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current location each query drains your battery
146. change server settings screen enter an updated Domain and confirm your user name and Password information Important Remember to manually place the cursor in the correct spot and enter a Domain name before the Domain user name entry Most servers only provide a username 9 Update or re enter your Exchange server information within the appropriate field This field can often be populated with incorrect or out of date information provided by your server Exchange Server your exchange server remote email address Typically starts with mail XXX com Obtain this information from your company network administrator Important Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on returned information If your network requires SSL encryption tap the Use secure connection SSL field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level Most often this option should be enabled f your network requires that you accept SSL certificates tap the Accept all SSL certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level Most often this option is not required Confirm this information with your IT Administrator Important If your exchange server requires this feature leaving this field unchecked can prevent connection 10 With the new server information entered tap Next 11 Read the on screen Activation disclaimer and when prompted tap OK The device then verifie
147. cipient Add to reject list press to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone 85 Touch and hold an entry to display the entry specific context menu Call Number to redial the current phone number Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected entry Edit number before call to make alterations to the current phone number prior to redial Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list Send contact information to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts View contact to view the information for the currently stored Contacts entry Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone Altering Numbers from the Call Log List If you need to make a call from the Call Log screen and you need to alter the number prior to dialing you can add the appropriate prefix by prepending the number 1 From the Home screen tap 2 2 Touch and hold an entry to access the entry specific context menu 3 Tap Edit number before call 4 Edit the number using the on screen keypad or delete digits by pressing El to erase the numbers 5 Tap o
148. creens The Application screens can be accessed by tapping Applications from the Primary shortcuts area Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number of times Primary Shortcuts are four shortcuts present throughout all of the available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or launch any of the following functions Phone qu launches the phone related screen functions Keypad Logs Contacts Favorites and Groups Contacts E launches the Contacts related screens Keypad Logs Contacts Favorites and Groups Messaging launches the Messaging menu create new messages or open an existing message string Applications Home toggles functionality between the Home and Application screens Tap s Applications to access the Application screens loaded with every available local application While in the Applications screens tap Home to easily return to the Home screen As you transition from screen to screen the screen counter located at the bottom displays the current panel number in a circle Understanding Your Device 38 Home Screen Menu Settings When on the Home screen the following menu options are available Add adds one of the following functions to a selected screen Widgets Shortcuts Folders and Wallpapers Wallpaper lets you to customize the current screen s wallpaper image by choosing from either Gallery Live Wallpaper or Wall
149. ctions to use Google 5 Visit www google com mobile for more information Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your phone 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 20 2 From the Home screen tap Lu gt Messenger or From the Google application select Messenger 3 Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google or Tap Create a new account to create another account 4 When prompted configure the Sync contacts parameter Sync contacts or Don t sync and tap Continue 5 When prompted configure the Instant Upload parameters as desired and tap DONE 6 Follow any on screen setup instructions 7 At the Messenger screen tap to start a new message 8 the upper text field enter a name email address or circle 9 Inthe bottom message field enter a message then tap 10 From the Messenger screen tap Learn more for more detailed information Messages 142 Section 8 Multimedia This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your phone including the Camera Camcorder Music Player and how to manage your photos images and sounds You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built in camera functionality Your camera produces photos in JPEG format Important
150. d USB Power Accessory connector allows you to connect a power cable or optional accessories such as a USB data cable 10 11 12 13 Quick search is used to search the device for applications contact information or searches the internet for information Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries Display shows all the information needed to operate your phone such as the connection status received signal strength phone battery level and time Power End key ends a call or switches the phone off and on Press and hold for two seconds to turn toggle the Silent mode or Airplane mode states turn the device on or off or Restart Headset jack allows you to connect a hands free headset so you can listen to music Microphone is used during phone calls and allows other callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them Itis also used to make voice note recordings and record stereo audio during ideo recordings Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the different ring tones or sounds offered by your phone Understanding Your Device 28 14 15 29 Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the surface of the screen This is typically used to detect when your face is pressed up against the screen such as during a phone call While talking on the phone the sensor detects talk activity and locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses Light Sensor lets you use the am
151. d as shown To remove the SIM card 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the SIM slot and push the card slightly out 3 Carefully slide the SIM card out of the SIM card socket Note If the card is not inserted correctly the device will not detect it and no service will be available If this happens turn off the device remove the card and reinstall the card in the correct orientation Installing the microSD Memory Card Your phone supports an optional external microSD or microSDHC memory card for storage of media such as music pictures video and other files The SD card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other devices Important Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the phone s contacts Note microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB microSDHC memory card types can range from 4GB S Incorrect to up to 32GB X Note This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card Since the device comes with 16GB of built in memory its maximum total storage capacity is 48GB 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the phone 3 Orient the card with the gold strips facing down 4 Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure that it catches with the push click insertion For more information on how to use the SD card see Using the SD Card on page 63 Getting Started 12 Removin
152. default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name phone number or other contact information 4 Tapthe radio button next to the entry information you want to be the primary information such as name phone number or email and select Save Contacts 110 Note If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry assigning one as the default will automatically dial that number when the contact is selected for dialing Sending a Namecard A Namecard contains contact information and can be sent to recipients as a Virtual Business Card V card attachment using Bluetooth Google Mail or as a message 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Tap a Contact entry 3 Press and then tap Share namecard via and select a delivery method Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is delivered when you send the message Note Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange email account has been created 111 Sending All Current Namecards Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time you can send all of your current entries at once 1 From the Home screen tap mB 2 Press and then tap Import Export gt Send namecard via 3 Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently displayed Contact entries 4 Tap and select a delivery method Bluetooth to transmit the contacts to another bluetooth compatible device Email to a
153. der For more information refer to Visual Voicemail on page 23 Voice Command Found within the Utility application allows you to use your voice to perform operations that you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number texting a message playing music etc For more information refer to Using Voice Command on page 72 Voice Recorder Found within the Utility application allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message For more information refer to Voice Recorder on page 204 Voice Talk Launches your phone s built in voice recognition system that allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the phone Features include Call Text Navigate Play music Memo and Driving mode For more information refer to Voice Talk on page 204 Web Open the browser to start surfing the web The browser is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone For more information refer to Web on page 207 You YouTube Launches the YouTube webpage via the browser For more information refer to YouTube on page 171 Zinio Launches a digital magazine reader Zinio has transformed your favorite print magazines into digital format For more information refer to Zinio on page 206 Screen Navigation Using the touch scree
154. djacent to the song name and select Add to playlist 4 Selectthe desired target playlist Applications gt Applications gt Playing a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap Lu Applications gt Ww Play Music 2 Select the PLAYLISTS tab 3 Tap m next to a playlist title and tap Play Deleting a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap LJ Applications gt Qv Play Music 2 Display the PLAYLISTS library view 3 Tap next to a playlist title and tap Delete Music Player Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap ta Applications gt Music player Music player tips display 2 Tapa tab to select the music category All Playlists Albums or Artists 3 Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback Note The 5 1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is connected through the headset jack only 4 Use any of the following Music Player controls Pause the song Start the song after pausing Press and hold to rewind the song Tap to go to previous song Press and hold to fast forward the song Tap to go to next song Volume control Allows you to listen to music using 5 1 Virtual Surround Sound Plays the entire song list once Replays the current list when the list ends Repeats the currently playing song shuffles the current list of songs randomly B8 H HMA songs play in order and are not shuffled faq lists the current playlist songs Multimedia
155. duct Specific 0 10 W kg Simultaneous Transmission 1 30 W kg SAR information on this and other model phones can be accessed online on the FCC s website through http transition fcc gov oet rfsafety sar html To find information that pertains to a particular model phone this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone Additional SAR information can also be obtained at http www fcc gov encyclopedia specific absorption rate sar cellular telephones FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15 21 of the FCC Rules you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmfu
156. e Choose from Extreme alerts Severe alert and AMBER alerts Note The Presidential alert can not be disabled Vibrate settings Push message allows you to configure the vibration mode associated with message alerts Choose from Always Only in Silent mode or Never Emergency Alert Configuration This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive geographically targeted messages Alert messages are provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within their area There is no charge for receiving an Emergency Alert message There are three types of Emergency Alerts Alerts issued by the President Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life AMBER Alerts missing child alert Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts Severe Alerts and AMBER Alerts Important Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled To disable Extreme Severe and AMBER Alerts 1 From the Home scree
157. e SAR is determined at the highest certified power level the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum reported value This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network In general the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna the lower the power output of the phone Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC Tests for each model phone are performed in positions and locations e g at the ear and worn on the body as required by the FCC For body worn operation this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a minimum of 1 0 cm from the body Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines The maximum SAR values for this model phone as reported to the FCC is are Cellular PCS WCDMA GSM EDGE and AWS WCDMA Head 0 23 W Kg Body worn Accessory 0 99 W Kg Product Specific 0 99 W kg Simultaneous Transmission 1 30 W kg WLAN Head 0 35 W Kg Body worn Accessory 0 31 W Kg Pro
158. e Widget into the Trash both items turn red This action doesn t delete the Widget it just removes it from the Current screen Understanding Your Device 60 To place a widget onto a different screen 1 Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent 2 Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page 3 Drag the widget to its desired position on the new Screen 4 Repeatthese steps to continue moving it to other Screens Installing the Bonus Apps Widget Provides the procedures necessary to install the T Mobile Bonus Apps Widget that allows you to discover those applications that are compatible specifically with your phone 1 Press oR go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold an empty area of the screen 3 From the Add to home screen window tap Widgets gt TA a Bonus Apps Read the Widget installation and tap OK 5 Once installed locate the Widget on your screen and tap Launch 61 6 Follow the on screen prompts Creating and Managing a Folder Folders hold items that you want to organize and store together on the workspace To create a new on screen folder Press cay to go to the Home screen Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Add to home screen window tap Folders Tap an available folder type and place it on the current screen PON Renaming a folder 1 Tap the desired folder
159. e application 5 Select a reason for uninstalling the application then tap OK Moving Third party Applications to your SD Card Your device s built in memory is augmented by using a microSD card to store additional data When the device s built in memory capacity is reached it can be possible to move some applications over to the internal microSD card Freeing up memory space on the phone can help avoid any sluggish performance when the phone has to work harder to manage memory resources Important Only certain downloaded applications are capable of being moved from device to card 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Applications 2 Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired application 3 Tap Move to SD card from within the Storage section of the Application info page Once the application has been moved to the microSD card this button now reads Move to device Running Services The Running services option allows you to view and control currently running services such as Backup Google Talk SNS messaging Swype and more 1 Press 3 and then tap Settings gt Applications 2 Tap the Running tab to view all currently active and running applications This tab also shows the total RAM being used by these currently active applications 3 a process and select Stop to end the process and stop it from running When you stop the process the service or application will no longer run until you star
160. e applications in the SDK and install them on this device then run the applications using the hardware system and network This feature allows you to configure the device for development Changing Your Settings 252 Warning Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company end users operate these devices at their own risk This menu allows you to manage installed applications You can view and control currently running services or use the device for application development You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data cache or defaults Press fay and then tap Settings gt Applications gt All Clearing Application Cache and Data Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Applications 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 253 3 Tap Force stop Clear data or Clear cache Uninstalling Third party Applications Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Applications 2 Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired application 3 Tap Uninstall from within the top area of the Application info page At the prompt tap OK to uninstall th
161. e are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that hands free kits reduce risks Hands free kits can be used for convenience and comfort They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised Unlike hands free kits these so called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate leading to an increase in RF absorption Children and Cell Phones The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure including children and teenagers The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers as well Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that
162. e entire photo is not showing on the screen Tools allows you to Copy and Paste to different images You can also use Warping and Fill Effects allows you to add various effects to your photo Color allows you to adjust the Saturation Contrast Brightness of a photo You can also make it Grey scale Next move to next photo project Previous move to previous photo project 5 Press to access the following options New starts a new Photo editor project Be sure and save the photo you are working on before starting a new project Save saves your photo to your gallery Share allows you to share your photo via AllShare Bluetooth Email Gmail Google Messaging Picasa Social Hub or Wi Fi Direct Files Files allows you to manage your sounds images videos bluetooth files Android files and other memory card data in one convenient location This application allows you to launch a file if the associated application is already on your phone ex MP4 m From the Home screen tap ty Applications gt Files For more information refer to Files on page 176 The Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message Note If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the Gallery access Files and remove some of the media files
163. e or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited Important When your device is in Airplane mode it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information or applications 1 Press ay gt and then tap Settings gt More 2 Tap Airplane mode A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Airplane mode is active The Airplane mode icon is displayed at the top of your screen USB Utilities 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt More gt USB utilities gt Connect storage to PC 2 If prompted tap OK to turn USB debugging mode off 3 Plug in a compatible USB cable to begin using the device for mass storage mode VPN settings The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual Private Networks VPNs Important Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one Adding a VPN Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to use PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol L2TP IPSec PSK Pre shared key based L2TP IPSec or L2TP IPSec CRT Certificate based L2TP IPSec 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt More gt VPN settings Changing Your Settings 236 2 If prompted read the screen lock information and follow the on screen steps to setup an unlock PIN or password 3 Tap Add VPN network 4 Inthe form that appears fill in the information provided by your network administrator 5 Tap
164. e restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots fuel storage and distribution areas chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked They include below deck on boats chemical transfer or storage facilities vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain dust or metal powders and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine When your Device is Wet Do not turn on your device if it is wet If your device is already on turn it off and remove the battery immediately if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery leave it as is Then dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center 295 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices The U S Federal Communications Commission FCC has established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices hearing aids and cochlear implants use wireless mobile devices they may detect a buzzing humming or whining noise Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise and mobile devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate The
165. e to use the Software for any reason 7 3 Upon termination of this License for any reason whatsoever Licensor retains the right to permanently disable your access to the Software 7 4 The termination of this License howsoever arising is without prejudice to the rights duties and liabilities of either party accrued prior to termination Clauses 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 3 8 9 and 10 of this License will continue to be enforceable notwithstanding termination 8 GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION 8 1 The formation existence construction performance validity and all aspects whatsoever of this License or of any term of this License will be governed by the laws of the State of New York 8 2 The courts in New York City will have non exclusive jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in connection with this License The parties irrevocably agree to submit to that jurisdiction 9 COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAW You acknowledge and agree that notwithstanding the fact that this License is governed by the laws of the Republic of Korea you may be subject to additional laws in other jurisdictions with respect to your use of the Software You Warranty Information 326 will comply with the laws of any jurisdiction that apply to the Software including without limitation any applicable export laws or regulations 10 GENERAL 10 1 If any clause or part of this License is found by any court tribunal administrative body or auth
166. e weight of scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency RF energy Over the past 15 years scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones While some researchers have reported biological changes associated with RF energy these studies have failed to be replicated The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand by mode Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects by heating tissue exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy Very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as is found in X rays and gamma rays can ionize biological tissues lonization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA the genetic material Health and Safety Information 276 The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy
167. een context menu 4 Tap Edit title 5 Enter a new name for this playlist and tap Save Multimedia 168 Transferring Music Files Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two methods 1 Downloaded to the device from the Play Store Music files are directly stored on your phone 2 Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card For more information refer to Communicating with the SD card on page 64 Removing Music Files 1 From the Home screen tap tg Music player 2 Tap the All tab 3 Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on screen context menu 4 Tap Delete OK The music file s is deleted Applications gt 169 AllShare This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile phone with your TV streams content and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real time on screen monitoring Samsung s AllShare makes staying connected easy Allows users to share their in device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified Digital Living Network Alliance Devices These external devices must also be DLNA compliant Wi Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer Important You must activate Wi Fi to use this application For more information refer to Wi Fi settings on page 232 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt AllShare
168. een tap Lu gt Koy Email Tap the account name field upper right to open the complete email account list page Tap Inbox gt Compose Enter the recipient s email address in the To field f you are sending the email message to several recipients separate the email addresses with a comma You can add as many message recipients as you want Press and then tap Add Cc Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients Use the Ce field to carbon copy additional recipients e Use the Bec field to blind copy additional recipients Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject Tap the email text field and compose your email message To add a n attachment such as image video audio etc tap Attach from the top of the screen and make a category selection Tap the file you wish to attach Tap to delete the attached file Note If you attach an image to your email you have the option to resize it prior to delivery Choose from Original Large 70 Medium 30 or Small 10 Once chosen tap OK 8 Once complete tap Send Configuring Email Settings 1 2 3 4 Alter any of the following settings From the Home screen tap La Email Select an account Press and then tap Settings gt account Account name displays your uniquely created account display name Your name displays the name used in the From field of your outgoing email messages Add signature L
169. eference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty 303 For any arbitration in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Claim the arbitrator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fees or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA rules In a Large Claim case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMS
170. en connected 4 Open the folder to view files 5 Copy files from the PC to the memory card Prior to using Kies air for Phone Update Before using Kies air to upgrade your device it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use To export a Contact list to your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap nB Contacts 2 Press and then tap Import Export 3 Tap Export to SD card gt OK For more information refer to Export Import on page 116 Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap La Applications gt Gallery 2 Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos 3 Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating a Kies air update Enabling USB Debugging USB debugging must be enabled before being able to use the Development feature 1 Press Al gt and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap the USB debugging field to verify the feature is active before connecting your USB cable 3 Using an optional PC data cable connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC Kies Air Kies Air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network You can view and share call logs videos photos music bookmarks ringtones and even send SMS messages from your PC Tip Before beginning it is recommended that you update the Java application running on your
171. en panels Drag Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to move it Do not release your finger until you have reached the target position 7T Mobile Swipe or slide Flick and Drag Rotate Rotate Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to landscape by turning the device sideways For example rotate to landscape orientation when entering text to provide a larger keyboard or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling Pinch Pinch the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom out when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers inward to zoom out Spread Spread the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers outward to zoom in Pinch Zoom Out Spread Zoom In T Mobile Understanding Your Device 52 Note These screens can be re arranged in any desired order For more information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 56 Motion Navigation and Activation The device comes equipped with the ability to assign specific functions to certain phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope Note Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active For more information refer to Motion Settings on page 271 53 Using Gestures By activating the various gesture features within the Motion menu page 271 you can access a
172. endar Event 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Calendar 2 From the Month tab press Create event Calendar Settings Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which you want the calendar to begin You also select how you want to view the calendar by Month Week or Day or determine how to manage events notifications sounds and defaults reminders 1 From the Home screen tap Lu Applications gt 2 Press Settings 10 11 Tap Calendars and select the calendar categories you want to display or tap All calendar A check mark indicates selection Tap Default view and select a view Month Week Day or List Tap Day view and select a type Time grid or Event list Tap First day of week and select either Monday or Sunday Tap Hide declined events to activate this option A check mark indicates selection Tap Hide contacts anniversaries to activate this option A check mark indicates selection Tap Lock time zone to lock event time based on your current user selected time zone Select a time zone from within the Select time zone field Tap Set alerts amp notifications to adjust the event notification method Choose from Alert Status bar notification and Off Tap Vibration to activate this notification option Selections are Always Only in silent mode or Never 12 Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event notification 13 Tap Calendar
173. eo It is recommended that you confirm your default storage location for images and videos From the Home screen tap L Applications gt Camera For more information referto Using the Camera on page 144 Clock Here you can set an Alarm configure and view the World clock use a Stopwatch set a Timer or use a Desk Clock The applications display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger m From the Home screen tap Applications gt Clock For more information refer to Clock on page 228 Contacts The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory m From the Home screen tap A Contacts For more information refer to Contacts List on page 101 Downloads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files Internet and Other 1 From the Home screen tap n Downloads 2 Tap an available file category tab Internet downloads or Other downloads and select the desired file Compatible document formats can be opened by Polaris Office page 197 Email enables you to review and create email using most email services The device alerts you when you receive an email message Applications gt From the Home screen tap Email For more information refer to Email on page 129 Applications gt Files Organize and store data images and more in
174. eo Volume 248 Video Chat 202 Recording Video 202 Settings 202 Videos Default Storage Location 153 Options 148 Voice Command 203 Using 72 Voice Input Recognition 266 Voice mail Accessing 23 Accessing from another phone 23 Setting up 22 Voice Talk 204 Voice Typing 87 Configuring 98 266 Using 99 Voicemail 247 Volume Settings Adjusting 248 VPN Adding 236 Connecting To 237 Deleting 237 Editing 237 Settings 236 W Wait 74 Wait dialing 74 Wallpapers Changing 62 Managing 62 342 Warranty Information 300 WCDMA 241 Weather Settings Lock Screen 249 Web 207 Clear Cookies 213 History 212 Set Home Page 212 Web applications enable downloading 218 Web Scripts Install 271 Widget Power Savings 17 Widgets Adding and Removing 60 Google Talk 48 Mini Diary 45 Moving to a Different Screen 61 Settings 47 198 Stopwatch 230 Wi Fi About 222 Activating 76 222 232 343 Advanced settings 224 Calling 76 Connecting to 222 Deactivating 223 Direct Connection 240 Frequency Band Usage 233 Manually Adding Network 233 Manually scan for network 223 Off 223 On 222 232 Settings 232 Status icons 223 Wi Fi Calling 10 Activating 77 238 Connection Preferences 77 238 Icons 78 Launching 78 Settings 77 238 Wi Fi Direct 240 Activate and Connect 240 Assining a Name 240 On 240 Windows Live Hotmail Adding Contacts From 114 World Clock DST Settings 230 WPA2 PSK 226 Y Yahoo 214 Yahoo Mail Adding Contacts From 114
175. eo on Demand m From the Home screen tap La Applications gt TED T Mobile TV For more information refer to T Mobile TV on page 171 Talk You can instant message with Google Talk Google Talk allows you to communicate with other people who are also connected with Google Talk on the phone or on the web m From the Home screen tap Applications gt Talk For more information refer to Google Talk on page 140 Task Allows you to keep track of both your current and upcoming tasks You can also sync these tasks with different accounts 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Utility gt E Task 2 Tap Create task to start a new task entry 3 Tap the Name field and enter a task name using the keypad Tap the Due date field and enter a due date name using the keypad If there is no date that the task is due tap the No due date checkbox If desired enter Task Priority Reminder and Notes then tap Save Atthe Task list screen press to display the following options Create allows you to create a new task Delete allows you to delete one or all of your tasks Search allows you to search your tasks for a particular word or words List by allows you to sort by Due date Status or Priority Sync task allows you to sync your tasks to any of your accounts Task Manager Sometimes your phone mightseem to slow down over time and the biggest reason for this are
176. era 175 pho qM 175 Contacts 176 Downloads 176 TETTE 176 B TD 176 Gallery earned er t pe eRe ame 177 o aser uai due 177 000916 o oe reread skons anan eR Ru 178 IMS sra E E dE 178 iuc acra a au d aed 178 Latitude 178 LOOKOUT iiis beaded dade ree x m ae 181 coe tae Part nineties oho 181 Media Hub 184 Memo 184 Messenger 185 Messaging 185 Mini Diary esiis 185 Mobile HotSpot 186 for 187 Music player 187 My T Mobile 25 2 so aee 188 Navigation 188 NEIDE 191 News amp Weather 191 Photo Editor 192 din Cp E 192 Play BOOKS ic 193 Play Movies 193 Play MUSIC ondes sese weeks 193 Play SIOfO coussin feos 194 Downloading a New Google Application 194 Launching an Installed Google Application 195 Android Development 196 Polaris Office 197 PrO ADDS iocus mer eene 197 suus 198 Settings ee 198 DIAGKE PM PE 198
177. erious injuries damages to your phone or other serious hazard Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety it benefits the environment Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly Recycling programs for your mobile device batteries and accessories may not be available in your area We ve made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile device by working with respected take back companies in every state in the country Drop It Off You can drop off your Samsung branded mobile device and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung Recycling Direct SM locations A list of these locations may be found at http pages samsung com us recyclingdirect usactivities environment samsungrecyclingdirect locations jsp Health and Safety Information 286 Samsung branded devices and batteries will be accepted at these locations for no fee Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or batteries at many retail or carrier provided locations where mobile devices and batteries are sold Additional information regarding specific locations may be found at hitp www epa gov epawaste partnerships plugin cellphone index htm or at http www call2recycle org Mail It In The Samsung Mobile Take Back
178. ets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails Signature Lets you create an email signature for your outgoing email messages Default account Assign this account as the default email account used for outgoing messages Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bcc or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails Forward with files ets you include attachments when forwarding an email Email check frequency adjusts the time interval used by your device to check your email account for new email messages Email notifications Activates the email notification icon to appear within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new email Gmail etc is received Select ringtone Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received Vibrate Activates a vibration when a new email message is received Incoming settings Lets you specify incoming email settings such as User Name Password IMAP server Port Security type and IMAP path prefix Outgoing settings Lets you specify outgoing email settings such as SMTP server Security type Port Require sign in User name or Password Messages 132 Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook Your phone also provides access to your company s Outlook Exchange server If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007 you can use this email
179. evice specific security featuresthatare coupled with a minimal performance hit For more information refer to Lookout on page 181 Maps Launches a Web based dynamic map that helps you find local businesses locate friends view maps and get driving directions For more information refer to Maps on page 181 Media Hub Provides you with a one stop shopforthe hottest movie and TV content You can now rent or purchase your favorite content and then watch it from the convenience of anywhere For more information refer to Media Hub on page 158 Messenger Allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your phone For more information refer to Messenger on page 142 Memo Found within the Utility application this creates new text memos For more information refer to Memo on page 184 Understanding Your Device 44 e 45 Messaging Provides access to text and multimedia messaging SMS and MMS For more information referto Creating and Sending Messages on page 120 Mini diary Found within the Utility application this allows you to create a mini diary where you can add a photo and text to describe an event or other memorable life event For more information refer to Mini Diary on page 185 Mobile HotSpot Provides access to the Tethering and portable HotSpot menu
180. evices such as headsets devices printers and computers To review your BLuetooth received files 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page press and then tap Show received files Pairing Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your device and another Bluetooth device When you pair devices they share a passkey allowing for fast secure connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process Note Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one time process Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode Connections 216 To pair your device with another Bluetooth device Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device 1 Verify Bluetooth is active Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the Visibility field between the device and your phone but retains the shown by the device name knowledge of the pairing At a later point when you wish to Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an reconnect the device there is no need to setup the connection information again 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the previously paired device from the bottom of the page 3 Tap OK to confirm disconnection or external device This is shown by a green
181. ew songs related to this GENRES Play Add to playlist More by artist Shop for artist or artist Search Multimedia 164 6 Tap the ALBUM name to view or play other songs on the album The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you can tap to control the playback of songs albums and playlists Tap to go back to the previous song Touch and hold to scan backward through the current song Tap to resume playback Tap to pause playback Tap to advance to the next song Touch and hold to scan forward through the current song When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When disabled as shown songs play in the order they appear in List view Also visible when is tapped When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When enabled songs play in random order Also visible when um is tapped 165 Tap to repeatthe currentsong repeatall songs or disable repeat mode Also visible when m is tapped Creating a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap QV Play Music 2 Tap an album or song list and play a song 3 Tap m gt mi adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist 4 Tap New playlist gt Playlist name field to enter a name for the playlist 5 Tap OK to save the new playlist Adding Songs to Playlists 1 From the Home screen tap QV Play Music 2 Tap an album or song list and play a song 3 Tap um gt m a
182. f your current account Contact entries to only show you the matching entries Contacts or Contacts 104 Editing Contact Information 1 From the Home screen tap B 2 Tapa contact name from the list and tap Edit or Touch and hold a Contacts entry then tap Edit Edit Delete Context Menu Join contact Share contact information 2 Remove from favorites E 3 Edit the contact information then e Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry 105 2 Adding a Number to an Existing Contact 1 From the Home screen tap B Touch and hold an entry and select Edit to reveal the Contact entry s details screen Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number Tap to enter an additional phone number Tap to remove a rmm 111 1111 Emm ps gmail com 1234 Anywhere Contact Details Screen previously entered phone number Enter additional information such as Email Address Events Groups Ringtone or tap Add another field to input additional category information Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Organization IM Notes Nickname or Website Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Delete
183. g Multiple Messages 125 Single Bubble 126 Single Message 125 Deleting a contact 106 Desk Clock 175 Configuring 231 Desktop Backup Password 272 Device Reset 269 332 Device Options Screen 247 Display Icons 30 Settings 30 Status Bar 30 Display Touch Screen 288 Displaying your phone number 66 DivX Locating VOD Number 156 Overview 156 Registering Your DivX Device 157 Registration Code 275 Do cell phones pose a health hazard 276 Dock Settings 269 Downloading New application 194 Downloads 176 Internet Downloads 176 Other Downloads 176 333 E EDGE Network 242 Email 129 Composing 131 Configuring Settings 132 Creating an Internet Account 130 Internet Email 130 Opening 131 Refreshing Messages 131 Sending 116 Emergancy Alerts 128 Emergency Alerts 128 Emergency Alert Configuration 128 Emergency Alerts AMBER 128 Imminent Extreme 128 Severe 128 Emergency Calls 289 Making 68 With SIM 69 Without SIM 68 Emoticons 121 Ending A call 67 Entering Text 87 Using SWYPE 88 Erasing files from Memory card 65 Exchange Email 133 Account Setup 133 Composing 135 Configuring Settings 136 Deleting Message 136 Opening 135 Refreshing Messages 135 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 276 Extreme Alert Disable 128 F Face Unlock 258 Facebook Video Chat 202 Factory Data Reset 269 Prior To 268 Factory data reset 65 Favorites Tab 118 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices 295 FCC Notice
184. g or sitting on it Other Important Safety Information Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the mobile device in a vehicle Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly When using a headset in dry environments static electricity can build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset Do not store or carry flammable liquids gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device its parts or accessories For vehicles equipped with an air bag remember that an air bag inflates with great force Do not place objects including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates serious injury could result Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft The use of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangero
185. g 70 2G Network Using 242 3G Network 242 Using 242 411 amp More 172 4G 225 4G Network 242 Using 242 A Accessibility Install Web Scripts 271 Accessing Recently used applications 56 Voice mail 23 Accounts and Sync Adding Contacts 114 Add 2 Sec Pause 74 Add to Favorites 118 Adjusting Call volume 79 Adobe PDF 197 Airplane Mode 236 Alarm Setting 228 Turning Off 229 Alarm Tone Set as 167 Alerts Presidential 128 Alerts on Call 244 Allow Diagnostics 18 269 Allowing Mock Locations 272 AllShare Configuring Settings 170 Receiving Media 170 Transmitting Media 170 AMBER Alerts Disable 128 AMBER alerts 128 Amergency alerts Message Settings 128 Android Beam 239 On 239 Answer Vibration 244 Answering a call 70 Answering Key 244 Application cache and data Clearing 196 Application Menus Navigating through 54 Application Screen Customizing View 58 Applications 39 411 amp More 40 AllShare 40 Asphalt 40 Blio 40 Browser 50 204 Calculator 41 174 Calendar 41 328 Camera 41 175 Clock 42 Contacts 42 Downloads 42 Email 42 176 Files 42 Gallery 42 Google Mail 43 177 Google Maps 44 181 Google 43 IM 43 Kies air 43 Latitude 44 Lookout 44 Media Hub 44 Memo 44 184 Messaging 45 messaging 185 Messenger 44 Mobile Hotspot 45 More for Me 45 Music 45 My T Mobile 45 Navigation 46 329 Netflix 46 News amp Weather 46 Photo Editor 46 Places 46 Play Books 46 Play Movies 47 Play Musc 47
186. g the call Choose from Call connect tone Minute minder and Call end tone Alerts on call selects whether alarm and message notification is turned off during a call Call answering ending allows you to manage the settings for answering and ending calls Answering key allows you to press a key to answer the phone Automatic answering when connected automatically answers a call via the headset after a period of time Selections are Off after 1 second after 2 seconds after 3 seconds after 4 seconds or after 5 seconds The Power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the current call Turn on proximity sensor allows you to turn off the LCD when the phone is near your face during a call so you do not accidentally tap a key Call forwarding configures call forwarding options TTY mode allows you to configure the TTY settings For more information refer to TTY Mode on page 245 Hearing aids allows you to enable disable hearing aid compatibility For more information refer to HAC Mode on page 245 Additional settings allows you to configure additional call settings For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 245 Configuring Call Forwarding 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt Call forwarding gt Voice call Tap an available option Always forward incoming calls are re routed to a seconda
187. g the microSD Memory Card 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Firmly press the card into the slot and release it The card should pop partially out of the slot 3 Remove the card from the slot 4 Replace the battery cover Battery Before using your device for the first time install the battery and charge it fully Important Before removing or replacing the battery make sure the device is switched off To turn the device off hold down the m key until the Device options screen displays then tap Power off Installing the Battery 1 Slide the battery into the compartment 1 so that the tabs on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone making sure the connectors align 2 Gently press down to secure the battery 2 13 Removing the Battery wm Grip the battery at the top end 3 and lift it up and out of the battery compartment 4 m Removing Battery Charging the Battery Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li ion battery A wall charger which is used for charging the battery is included with your phone Use only approved batteries and chargers Ask your local Samsung dealer for further details Before using your device for the first time you must fully charge the battery A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4 hours Charging Head Incorrect Note Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger If both the wall charger i
188. gateway to mobile video like you ve never experienced it before You must have the Samsung Account application installed and registered prior to using Media Hub Note Media Hub usage is based on service availability Important You must be using an active Wi Fi 4G connection to preview and download a media file The internal memory acts as a storage location for your downloaded rental or purchase Multimedia 158 Creating a New Media Hub Account Before you can rent or buy media you must first create an account Enter the required information 1 From the Home screen tap w Media Hub 2 If prompted read the End User License Agreement EULA and tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit 3 Press and then tap My Profile Applications gt Note Your Media Hub account is managed by the Samsung account application This application manages your user profile information 4 Usethe keypad to enter the required information then tap Sign up Follow the on screen instructions to complete your registration for a new Samsung account 159 Using Media Hub 1 From the Home screen tap Lu Applications gt m Media Hub 2 Press and then tap My Profile Enter your profile information and tap Sign in 4 Atthe Media Hub screen scroll through What s New What s New shows recently added media that is available for rent or purchase or Tap Options and select one of the following options Movies displays m
189. gs 3 Select a DST setting Automatic Off 1 hour or 2 hours Stopwatch This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the stopwatch keep running 1 From the Home screen tap Clock gt Stopwatch tab Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter Tap Stop to stop the counter Tap Restart to restart the lap counter You can have multiple lap times 6 Tap Reset to reset the counter Applications gt go PON Time Management 230 Setting a Timer 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Clock gt Timer tab 2 Tapthe hr min or sec field and use the on screen keypad to enter the hour minute or seconds The timer plays an alarm at the end of the countdown 3 Tap Start to start the timer 4 Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and start over 5 Tap Restart to resume the timer counter Configuring a Desk Clock This feature lets you activate an on screen clock that can be viewed when the device is docked m From the Home screen tap Applications gt Clock gt Desk clock tab 231 Section 12 Changing Your Settings This section explains the sound and phone settings for your device It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your phone Accessing Settings m From the Home screen tap Applications gt Settings or Press CN gt and then tap Settings
190. gs gt More gt Mobile networks gt Use packet data Data Roaming Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage 1 Press 3 and then tap Settings gt More gt Mobile networks 2 Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while roaming outside your network or Tap Data roaming again to remove the green check mark and deactivate the feature 241 Access Point Names To access a wireless access point m Press Al gt and then tap Settings gt More gt Mobile networks gt Access Point Names A list of the Access point names display The active access point displays a bright green filled circle to the right of the name Network mode You can configure your phone to either manually detect and use either a 2G GSM or 3G WCDMA data network connection m Press and then tap Settings gt gt Mobile networks Network Mode Using the 4G Network Note Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer To confirm you are always using the fastest possible speed and time connection the phone has an automatic detection method where it finds both the fastest and most stable connection Using the 36 Network communication method This phone is capable of using either 46 36 services for this connection If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed follow the
191. h About displays the version information for the Qik Video Cha application Recording a Video Chat 1 From the Home screen tap T Mobile Video Chat Tap Record amp Share Read the one time disclaimer describing the public nature of your videos and tap OK LJ Applications gt Applications and Development 202 o 4 Tap Record to start recording Tap Stop to end the recording process 5 Enter a title for your video segment and select those services you wish to use to distribute your video e Services such as Twitter Facebook YouTube SMS and E mail ask that you select a recipient for your video segment Videos The Video Player application plays video files stored on your microSD card m From the Home screen tap LJ Applications gt tility gt 3 videos For more information refer to Using the Video Player on page 156 203 Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order m From the Home screen tap led Visual Voicemail For more information refer to Visual Voicemail on page 23 Voice Command This application can use your voice to perform operations that you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone number texting a message playing music etc Applications gt From the Home screen tap Lu Applicati
192. h as the font orientation pop up notifications puzzle lock feature animation brightness screen timeout and power saving mode Adjusting the Screen Display 1 Press ay gt and then tap Settings gt Display 2 Configure the following screen display settings Screen display Home screen wallpaper assigns an image from either the Gallery Live wallpapers or Wallpaper gallery to the Home Screen Lock screen wallpaper assigns an image from either the Wallpaper gallery or Gallery to the Lock screen Clock activates deactivates the display of an on screen Clock within the Lock screen 249 Weather activates deactivates the display of an on screen weather notification within the Lock screen Once enabled you can also modify the Weather settings feature Clock and weather position allows you to specify the location of the Clock and Weather information on the Lock screen Choose from Top Middle or Bottom Help text activates deactivates the display of Help text on the Lock screen Brightness adjusts the on screen brightness level For more information refer to Adjusting Screen Brightness on page 250 Auto rotate screen when enabled the phone automatically Switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa When this setting is disabled the phone displays in portrait mode only Screen timeout adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically turns off Selections are 1
193. h of the applications on your device and clear the data cache or defaults m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Applications Clearing application cache and data 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Applications 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Applications and Development 196 Uninstalling third party applications You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed from the Play Store 1 Press and then tap Settings gt Applications 2 Tap the third party application and from the Application info screen tap Uninstall Polaris Office Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline The application can also open Adobe PDF Portable Document Format files 1 From the Home screen tap W Polaris Office 2 Read the registration information and enter your Name and Email information if desired 3 Tap Later to ignore this registration or Register to complete the process Applications gt 197 4 its initial launch tap an available tab New creates a new office document My Files This is where you keep your documents on this device You can manage documents or send them to others and upload the documents Recent docs provides a list of recently opened documents Web fi
194. has been configured you will not be prompted with setup screens again 1 Press and hold until the device switches on The device searches for your network and after finding it you can make or receive calls Note The display language is preset to English at the factory To change the language use the Language menu For more information refer to Language and Input Settings on page 262 2 Press and hold until the Device options screen appears 3 Tap Power off gt 0K 19 Restarting the Device 1 Press and hold s until the Device options screen appears 2 Tap Restart iy gt 0K Locking and Unlocking the Device By default the device screen locks when the backlight turns off Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of the directions shown unlock the device Creating a New Google Account You should create a Google Account when you first use your device in order to fully utilize the functionality This account provides access to several device features such as Gmail Google Maps Google Search and the Play Store applications Before you are able to access Google applications you must enter your account information These applications sync between your device and your online Google account To create a new Google Account from your phone 1 From the Home screen tap LE 5 Play Store 2 Readthe introduction and tap New to begin 3 Fol
195. he Service or any content or service contained in or provided through the Service or any servers used in providing the Service or to unreasonably affect others enjoyment of the Service in any way 313 Actions Required by Law Samsung may need to comply with lawful interception and or data retention requirements imposed by your country of residence or any other country in which you use the Service Samsung may restrict access to any part of the Service or terminate your access to the Service at any time in its sole discretion if required by law or by the relevant authorities or regulatory agencies to do so Third Party Sites and Content The Service may allow access to sites on the Internet that are owned or operated by third parties Access to such sites does not imply that Samsung endorses the site or the conduct products or services on the site Upon accessing any such site you must review and agree to the rules of use of the relevant site before using the site You acknowledge and agree that Samsung has no control over the content products or services of third party sites and does not assume any responsibility for or in respect of such content products or services Third party content and services may be terminated or interrupted at any time and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for
196. he list to describe the weather conditions for this entry 7 Tap Save Mini Diary settings 1 zm the Home screen tap ES Utility Mini Diary 2 From the main Diary listings page press E and then tap Settings 3 Tap Auto update if you want the settings to automatically update Deleting a Mini Diary entry 1 From the Home screen tap La Applications gt Fal Utility gt 2 Press 5 and then T Delete all Mini Diary options 1 From the Home screen tap iss EH Utility gt 2 Selecta diary entry 3 Press and select one of the following options Applications gt Applications gt Create creates a new diary entry Delete deletes the displayed entry Go to provides access to a calendar Change photo replaces the photo in this entry by allowing you to take another photo or use another image Delete photo deletes the photo from this entry when you touch Yes to confirm Publish allows you to post the new diary entry to an SNS service such as Facebook Send via to deliver the entry via either Email or Messaging Mobile HotSpot Provides access to the Tethering and portable HotSpot menu where you can use either the USB tethering or portable HotSpot functionality 1 From the Home screen tap 5 Mobile HotSpot 2 Activate the desired connection method For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 225 Applications gt Applicatio
197. he main application Sharing your Location with Friends 1 From the map view if not already displaying Latitude icon at the top tight tap the bottom right arrow from E Latitude to display your Latitude friends At first only your name is displayed 2 From the bottom of the Latitude map screen tap FRIENDS LIST gt Add friends Tap Add friends 179 6 Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address Tap a contact or enter an email address then tap Add friends Tap Yes at the Send sharing requests prompt Your friend will receive an email or text message with your location marked on a map They will also receive instructions on how to view your location from the web or use Latitude on their phone or tablet provided it is available Once they acknowledge your request their location will display on your tablet They can share their location from their computer phone or tablet For more information go to http www google com latitude To view the map tap MAP VIEW Latitude Options From the Latitude map display press and select one of the following Clear Map allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map Search allows you to search for a place of interest Directions displays navigation directions to a location from a starting point Layers allows you to switch map views Traffic available only in selected areas Real time traffic conditions are displayed over r
198. her products copy modify translate or transfer to any third party the Software or any modification adaptation or copy of the Software or any part thereof nor to decompile reverse engineer or disassemble the binary code of the Software either in whole or in part except as expressly provided in this License 2 3 The Software is licensed to you only You may not rent lease sub license sell assign pledge transfer or otherwise dispose of the Software on a temporary or permanent basis without the prior written consent of Licensor 3 OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 3 1 Your only right to use the Software is by virtue of this License and you acknowledge that all intellectual property rights in or relating to the Software and all parts of the Software are and shall remain the exclusive property of Licensor or its licensors 3 2 You agree that you will not remove or alter any copyright notices or similar proprietary devices including without limitation any electronic watermarks or other identifiers that may be incorporated in the Software or any copy of the Software 4 CONFIDENTIALITY 4 1 The structure organisation and source code of the Software are the valuable trade secrets and proprietary confidential information of Licensor and its licensors You agree not to provide or disclose any such confidential information in the Software or derived from it to any third party 4 2 The provisions of clause 4 1 will not a
199. high degree of pressure on the battery This can cause leakage or an internal short circuit resulting in overheating Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids Liquids can get into the phone s circuits leading to corrosion Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard If the phone and or battery get wet have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung even if they appear to be working properly Do not place your battery in or near a heat source Excessive heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the battery to explode Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven hair dryer iron or radiator Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire The phone or the battery may explode when overheated 285 Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery Do not let leaking battery fluid come in contact with your eyes skin or clothing For safe disposal options contact your nearest Samsung authorized Service center Avoid dropping the cell phone Dropping the phone or the battery especially on a hard surface can potentially cause damage to the phone and battery If you suspect damage to the phone or battery take it to a service center for inspection Never use any charger or
200. hile Driving On the Road Off the Phone The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating drinking talking to passengers or talking on a mobile phone unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive Always obey them The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas For example only hands free use may be permitted in certain areas Before answering calls consider your circumstances Let the call go to voicemail when driving conditions require Remember driving comes first not the call If you consider a call necessary and appropriate follow these tips Use a hands free device Secure your phone within easy reach Place calls when you are not moving Plan calls when your car will be stationar
201. hin Google maps maps google com Navigation Map options Once on the map screen you can access the following features Destination returns you to the previous Navigation options screen Search by voice Speak your destination instead of typing Layers allows you to switch map views e Traffic view available only in selected areas Real conditions are displayed over roads as color coded color represents how fast the traffic is moving ime traffic ines Each Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Satel best ite images are not real time Google Earth acq three years old Parking displays parking information relative to you locati on uires the imagery available most of which is approximately one to current Gas Stations displays gas station location relative to your current location ATMs amp Banks displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your current location Restaurants displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to your current location While on the map screen press to access additional options Exit navigation terminates the application Mute allows you to mute the audio readout and directional information Set destination returns you to the navigation options screen where you can access a destination by either Speaking Typing or selecting from a Contacts entry or Starred Place Search manually se
202. hoose from among the various categories Matches are filtered by those Closest to your current location 3 Locate and tap one of the listed places Restaurants Cafes Bars Attractions user added searches or IN THIS AREA A list of places within this category displays 4 Tap the Maps icon to launch the related maps feature 5 Press and then tap Add a search The functions adds additional search shortcuts to the places screen Applications and Development 192 Play Books Formerly known as Google Books this application allows you to read over 3 million ebooks on the go Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books jump right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks Personalize the reader to your liking pick up reading where you left off on your phone or computer and settle down with a great book on your Android phone 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt WW Play Books 2 If prompted tap Turn sync on This synchronizes your books you have previously selected between your Books account and your device 3 Tap to begin searching for both free and paid ebooks 4 Follow the on screen prompts to download the ebook to your device 193 Play Movies This application allows you to connect to the Play Store download a movie and then watch it instantly Learn more about Google Play Movies at hitp play google com about movies m From the Home screen tap Applications gt
203. icates the activation status When active displays in the Status area To turn Bluetooth off 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off 28 Note Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use Activating the Device Name 1 Press AO gt and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 Verify Bluetooth is active indicated by EN 3 Press and tap the Device name The assigned device name displays 4 Tap E x to erase the current device name and enter a new name for this device using the keyboard 5 Tap OK to confirm your setting Activating Visibility 1 Press Ol gt and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 Verify your Bluetooth is active 3 From the top of the Bluetooth settings page toggle the state of the visibility check mark Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate Changing Your Settings 234 Scanning for Devices This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you can pair with them 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page tap Scan for devices to search for visible external Bluetooth compatible devices such as headsets devices printers and computers Important Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to confirm and pair with them 3 Enter a PIN to pair with the device if one
204. idden to use it or when it may cause interference or danger When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device read its user s guide for detailed safety instructions Do not connect incompatible products Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency RF signals However certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives Implantable Medical Devices A minimum separation of six 6 inches should be maintained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator to avoid potential interference with the device Persons who have such devices Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six 6 inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your implantable medical device If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device con
205. ifications window when there is a new Email message Displays in the notifications window when there is anew Gmail message Displays when anew Google notification has been received Displays when the T Mobile Name ID application didnot recognize arecentnumber and would like to know whether you wish to Not add or add as a New or Existing number Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event has arrived For more information refer to Calendar on page 227 Understanding Your Device 32 wee C 3 o E Displays when alarm is set For more information referto Setting an Alarm on page 228 Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds except media and alarms are silenced and Silent mode is set to Vibrate For more information refer to Silent mode via Device Options Screen on page 247 Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds are silenced and Silent mode is set to Mute Displays when data synchronization and application sync is active and synchronization is in progress for Gmail Calendar and Contacts Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and enabled Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and there is an available open and visible bluetooth device Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active and communicating with an external device ISOT D OD e 3 K E JB i Displays when the an outbound file transfer is i
206. ilter Moderate or Strict blocking 205 Zinio Launches a digital magazine reader Zinio has transformed your favorite print magazines into digital format 1 From the Home screen tap La Applications gt B Zinio 2 Tap sign in if you already have an account or tap create an account to continue 3 Follow the on screen prompts Applications and Development 206 Section 10 Connections Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly connect to the web Web Your phone is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the mobile web This section explains how to navigate the browser and use the basic features Accessing the Internet To access the Browser amp the Home screen tap Applications gt Web Note You must disable your Wi Fi connection if you wish to view the web2go home page http home web2go com Homepage When you access the Browser the web2go home page displays the following topics Google Search allows you to quickly search for online topics using the Google search engine 207 Advertisement provides an on screen scroll of today s top stories Quick Links provides a series of application shortcuts These shortcuts can be edit and managed Today provides an on screen display of today s top news and entertainment stories Recommended for you provides a series of applications that are compatible with your device and current top stories that might
207. iltto S zoom Once enabled you must be on a screen where content can be zoomed In a single motion touch and hold two points zoom on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to in or out Pan to edit Once enabled allows you to move an on screen icon f movin sensit one screen to another by simply holding it down then g the device left or right You can also adjust the ivity of this detection Double tap Once enabled double tap the top of the device to actival e the Voice command functionality Turn over to mute Once enabled turn over the device screen down to incoming calls and currently playing sound e For more information refer to Using Gestures on page 53 Developer Options Use the Developer options to set options for application development m Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Developer options Important These features are used for development purposes only USB Debugging When enabled allows debugging when the device is attached to a PC by a USB cable 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap USB debugging to enable or disable the setting When enabled a check mark appears in the check box Development device ID The identification number for your tablet when using it as a development tool displays in this field Allowing Mock Locations Note This feature is used for development purposes only If
208. indow when action is required within the Samsung account application Displays in the notifications window when there are too many on screen notification icons to display Tap to show more notifications EE OOSME 3 Tap to select a text input method Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Music Player Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Play Music application Displays when your device s GPS is on and communicating Displays when the external SD card internal microSD has been disconnected unmounted from the phone and is now ready for either removal or formatting Displays whenthe contents ofthe microSD card are being scanned Displays when the External SD card is being prepared for mounting to the device This is required for communication with the External SD card Displays when the microSD card has been improperly removed Understanding Your Device 34 E Displays when Power saving mode is enabled Displays when the Power saving alert notification has been activated You are then prompted to view your current battery level Displays when TTY device has been inserted uM For more details on configuring your device s settings see Changing Your Settings on page 232 Notification Bar The Notification area indicates new message events data sync status new messages calendar events call status etc You ca
209. ing Settings Important A new ISIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt More gt Wi Fi Calling Settings 2 Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use of the Wi Fi Calling feature Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range Wi Fi Only Wi Fi network is required for making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range Cellular Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls 3 Tap OK to save the setting USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot This option allows you to share your phone s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and computer A wireless version of this same functionality would be the Mobile AP feature Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http www samsung com us support downloads Changing Your Settings 238 1 Press USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot For more information refer to Tethering on page 224 For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 225 Near Field Communication This feature is used to read and exchange tags
210. ings 118 GSM 241 Gyro Sensor Calibration 250 Gyroscope Calibration 250 H Haptic feedback 249 Health and Safety Information 276 Hearing Aids 244 Hold Placing a call on hold 79 335 Home 37 Home Key 36 Home Screen Assigning a New 57 Menu Settings 39 Overview 37 Wallpaper 249 Home screens Customizing 56 HSPA 225 Icons Description 30 Indicator 30 Status 30 IM 141 178 Images Assigning as a Contact icon 150 Assigning as wallpaper 150 Transferring 220 268 Verifying 220 268 Importing and Exporting To SIM card 116 In call Options 79 80 Incognito 210 Create Window 210 Exit Window 210 Indicator icons 30 Instant Messaging 141 International Call 73 International Calls Making 73 Internet 207 Search 209 Internet Downloads 176 Internet Email 129 IP Address 274 ISIM Overview 10 J Joining Contact information 108 K Kies Air Before Using 220 Kies air 178 Language Select 262 LinkedIn Adding Contacts From 114 Live Wallpapers 249 Lock Screen Clock 249 Showing Owner Info 260 Viewing Missed Calls 86 Wallpaper 249 Weather 249 Weather Settings 249 Low battery indicator 16 M Making Emergency Calls 68 International Calls 73 New call 66 Managing Applications Clearing Application Cache 253 Moving Third party Applications to Card 253 Uninstalling Third party Applications 253 Market see Play Store 194 Marking contact As a default 110 Mass Storage 219 236 Media Hub 158 184 Creating a New Account
211. io feedback tums on sounds generated by the Swype application Vibrate on keypress activates a vibration sensation as you enter text using the keypad Show tips tums on a flashing indicator for quick help Auto spacing automatically inserts a space between words When you finish a word just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word Changing Your Settings 262 263 Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence Show complete trace once enabled sets wether or not to display the complete Swype path Word suggestion suggests words as you are typing Speed vs accuracy sets how quickly Swype responds to on screen input Move the slider between Fast Response speed or Error Tolerant accuracy and tap OK Reset Swype s dictionary once enabled deletes any words you have added to Swype s dictionary Locate the About section to review the Swype application information Version lists the Swype version number Tap Language Options to activate and select the current text input language Default language is US English Samsung Keypad Settings 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt adjacent to the Samsung keypad field or From within an active text entry screen tap 1 from the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keypad settings screen Set any of the following options Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a
212. ion explains how to use and manage your Contacts List You can save phone numbers to your phone s memory Accounts From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to synchronize send and receive data at any given time or if you want the applications to synchronize automatically After determining how you want the accounts to synchronize indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts list 1 2 Sign in to your Google account Press then tap Settings gt Accounts and sync or From the Home screen tap ta Applications gt Settings gt Accounts and sync If not already active in a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on EN The slider color indicates the activation status Synchronize all accounts by tapping Sync all or Tap e next to the account you want to synchronize Tap Add account to create a new account Tap an account type to add Follow the on screen instructions The selected account type synchronizes with your Contacts list Contacts 100 Contacts List Creating a Contact The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been synchronized to your phone these will be made available to your device during the creation of new entries These new Contacts entries can be assigned or saved to synced accounts such as Phone SIM G
213. is required and tap OK Data Usage Monitor and mange your device s data usage capabilities Features include activation deactivation or network data usage set mobile data usage for a set period of time and view application data usage 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt Data usage 235 To activate deactivate Mobile data usage 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt Data usage 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Mobile data slider to the right to turn it on EN 3 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Mobile data slider to the left to turn it off 22 To set a mobile data limit 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wireless and network gt Data usage 2 Place a check mark in the Set mobile data limit field Read the on screen disclaimer info and tap OK 4 Touch and drag the far right ends of the Red or Orange horizontal lines to manually adjust both the Warning and Maximum data limits 5 Touch and drag the bottom grey vertical lines to adjust the time frames 6 Tap the Data usage cycle button and select either the current cycle or define your own by selecting Change cycle More Settings This tab displays additional wireless and network information m Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt More Using Airplane mode This mode allows you to use many of your phone s features such as Camera Games and more when you are in an airplan
214. ist Settings From this menu you can determine the default storage location for Contacts display your phone s primary number and view service numbers listed in your Contact list 1 From the Home screen tap B i 2 Press and then tap Settings Configure any of the following options e Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those contacts containing phone numbers List by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted First name or Last name Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are listed First name first ex Steve Smith or Last name first Smith Steve Service numbers lists the currently available service numbers Send contact allows you either Send all namecards or Send individual namecards to an external device Contacts 116 Groups This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call group This group can be one of the already present groups Family Friends or Work or a user created group Creating a New Caller Group 1 From the Home screen tap B gt Groups tab 2 Press and then tap New 3 Tap the Group name field and use the on screen keypad to enter a new group name For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 87 4 Tap Group ringtone and select a ringtone for the group Selections are Default Ringtones or Go to My files 5 Tap Save to store the newly created group Note Some externally maintained group types
215. keypad configuration Qwerty Keypad default or 3x4 Keypad Input languages sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to the selected language XT9 enables predictive text entry mode This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings XT9 advanced settings configuration of more advanced XT9 features For more information refer to XT9 Advanced Settings on page 264 Keypad sweeping allows changing between the input modes without having to use the Input Mode key You can sweep the displayed keypad aside in a similar manner to scrolling through the Home screens Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence standard English style Voice input activates the Voice input feature This is an experimental feature that uses Google s networked speech recognition application Auto full stop automatically inserts a full stop by tapping the Space bar twice Tutorial launches a brief on screen tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keypad XT9 Advanced Settings XT9 is a predictive text system that has next letter prediction and regional error correction which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QW
216. l not function properly since it is Samsung account that is managing their username and password access Voice Mail Setting Up Your Voice Mail Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to voicemail even if your device is in use or turned off As soon as your battery is charged and the SIM card inserted activate your voicemail account Important Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access For new users follow the instructions below to set up voice mail Note Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network 1 From the Home screen tap X and then touch and hold the key until the device dials voice mail You may be prompted to enter a password 2 Follow the tutorial to create a password a greeting and a display name Getting Started 22 Accessing Your Voice Mail You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding on the keypad or by using the phone s Application icon then tapping the Voice Mail application To access Voice Mail using the menu 1 From the Home screen tap m and then touch and hold until the device dials voice mail Note Touching and holding will launch Visual voicemail if itis already active on your device 2 When connected follow the voice prompts from the voice mail center Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone 1 Dial your wireless phone number 2 When you hear your voicemail greeting press the asterisk key on the phone
217. l domain www google com Terms of service displays the applications service terms Open Source Licenses displays the applications open source license information About Phone This menu contains legal information system tutorial information and other phone informa number firmware version baseband and software build number To access phone information tion such as the model version kernel version m Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt About phone The following information displays Software update allows you to connect to the network and upload any new phone software directly to your device The device automatically updates with when you access this option he latest available software Status displays the battery status the level of the battery percentage the network connecti ion signal strength mobile network type service state roaming status mobile network State the phone number for this device IMEI number IMEI SV IP address Wi Fi MAC address BI number and Up time uetooth address Serial Changing Your Settings 274 Legal information This option displays information about Open source licenses License settings as well as Google legal information This information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service Terms of Service for Android powered Phones and much more pertine
218. l interference in a Health and Safety Information 282 residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the 283 provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Smart Practices W
219. l provider Tap Next At the Account options screen select the frequency which the device should check for new email on the server and tap Next Tap the Notify me when email arrives field to receive new email notifications Atthe Set up email screen name the account and enter a screen name to identify yourself on this account The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from other email accounts accessed by your device Tap Done to store the new account Messages 130 Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab You can also view Personal information for this account Receipts if you setup the account to return receipts Travel information and more if available Opening an Email 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap Lu gt Email Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Selecting Combined view allows you to view all the emails for your current accounts managed by the application to be listed on a single screen Select an email account and tap an email message Refreshing Email messages 1 2 131 From the Home screen tap Select an email account e f you are already in an email account tap the account name Lu Email field upper right to open the complete email account list page Select an available email account Press and then tap Refresh Composing Email 1 2 From the Home scr
220. l remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Snooze repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned to this alarm How many times will the snooze silence the alarm 9 Tap the radio button to activate Smart alarm which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of nature tones to simulate dawn breaking Tap the field to assign a duration time 3 min 5 min 10 min 15 min or 30 min and nature tone Morning Breeze Mist Forest Light or Rain Duration category describes the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Tone category provides one of several nature sounds that are used as the alarm tone 10 Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm 11 Tap Save to store the new alarm event Turning Off an Alarm m To stop an alarm when it sounds touch and slide to the right Setting the Snooze Feature m activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds touch and slide to the left Snooze must first be set in the alarm settings World Clock This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of world 1 From the Home screen tap Applications Clock 2 Tap the World clock tab 3 Tap Add city then scroll and select the desired city or tap in the search field to locate a city To assign DST settings 1 Locate a desired city from the World Clock list 2 Touch and hold a city and select DST settin
221. lay Store and stream them instantly on your Android phone or tablet Movies previously rented via the Play Store are automatically added to your My Movies library across your devices Learn more about Google Play Movies at http play google com about movies 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Play Movies 2 Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list 3 Following the on screen instructions for renting and viewing movies 4 Tap the My Rentals tab to view movies you have rented 161 5 Tap the Personal Videos tab to view movies you have on your phone or memory card Play Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Play Store The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download The Music application contains a music player that plays music and other audio files that you copy from your computer 1 From the Home screen tap co Applications gt Ge Play Music The Music app searches both your online library and your device s internal storage for music and playlists this can take from a few seconds to several minutes depending on the amount of new music added since you last opened the application It then displays a carousel view of your new and recent music organized by album 2 Swipe left or right
222. le Configure the scale for animation ranges from off to 10x gt and then tap Settings gt Developer 273 Transition animation scale Configure the scale for transitioning when using animation ranges from off to 10x Application Options 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap Do not keep activities to destroy every activity as soon as the application is closed 3 Tap Limit background processes to set the number of processes that can run in the background Options are Standard limit No background processes and 1 to 4 processes at most 4 Tap Show all ANRs to display a prompt when applications running in the background are not responding Google Search Settings Use Google Search to search the Web 1 Press IC gt and then tap Search 2 Press Settings 3 any of the following search parameters to then alter the settings Google Search opens a screen where you can set your Google search preferences Use Web History includes search matches from Google s online search engine Manage Web History helps to manage the personalized search history associated with your current registered Google account Clear on device search history erases the history for recently selected search results Use My Location uses your My Location information for Google search results and services Search on google com allows you to search using your selected loca
223. le motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select E Select input method gt Samsung keypad 2 The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung keypad configuration for all subsequent text input Shift key Text input field Hi there have cool new phone Input Mode Settings Current Mode Delete Indicator Changing the Text Input Mode in Keypad 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 With Samsung keypad as your text entry method select one of the following text mode options Abc to use alphabetic characters from the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays 2123 Symbol Numeric 7123 to enter numbers by pressing the numbers selecting them on the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays There are up to 3 available pages of numeric symbols available by tapping Note After typing an initial uppercase character tap to toggle capitalization All lowercase Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase All Uppercase Displays when all characters will be entered as uppercase characters Entering Text 94 By default the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the following letters are lowercased
224. le text message reply templates For more information refer to Text Templates on page 129 Settings allows you to access Messaging settings For more information refer to Messaging Settings on page 126 Delete threads allows you to delete any message thread Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will appear next to the message Tap Delete For more information referto Deleting a single message thread on page 125 Options while composing a message 1 2 From the Home screen tap Messaging From within an open message press to display additional messaging options Insert smiley allows you to add insert smiley icons images emoticons Call places an outgoing call to the sender Preview provides a preview of the MMS message content Add text allows you to add text items from sources such as Location Contacts Memo Task Calendar and Text templates e View contact reveals the current Contact s overview screen Add Remove slide converts an SMS message into an MMS Multimedia message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow Once the message has been message press and reveal addi Duration 5 sec and Layout converted into in an MMS tional options such as Preview and bottom Add subject allows you to enter a subject Delete messages allows you to erase either select specific message bubbles or all current messages bubbles Addi
225. les This provides your online storage information at Box net You can also share your documents to others without using email attachments Search allows you to search for document files by using a text String Pro Apps Provides access to compatible productivity tools These productivity packs can be accessed from anywhere Note Access to these applications and packs requires you have an active Google account and are logged in prior to connection 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt amp Pro Apps Select an application and follow the on screen download and installation instructions Search Use Google Search to search the Web m From the Home screen tap Applications gt S Search and enter the search text or Tap on the Google Search bar and say the search information Settings This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your phone From the Home screen tap La Applications gt Settings Q0r Press CN gt and then tap Settings For more information refer to Changing Your Settings on page 232 Slacker Slacker offers free Internet radio for mobile phones 1 From the Home screen tap Lu Applications gt Slacker Important You must register and create a free account prior to using this service 2 If prompted enter your E
226. like purchased Media Content rented Media Content will be viewable on only 1 device in your account Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card Your Media Content may pause stop or not download in networks where there is a weak signal You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a license acquisition has occurred and b sufficient amount of the Media Content has been buffered You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive hours of start of playback Stopping pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not extend the available viewing time n no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of more than thirty 30 days or shorter on a title by title basis after the Media Content has been rented g if you begin viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction but do not finish viewing the entire title that rented Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty four 24 consecutive hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond the thirty 30 day rental window Multimedia 160 You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub through any output on your mobile phone including All Share Play Movies This application allows you to connect to the Play Store download a movie and then watch it instantly Choose from thousands of movies including new releases and HD titles in the P
227. low the on screen instructions to create a Google Account reen to unlock SAMSUNG If this is not the first time you are starting the phone tap ty gt IVA Gmail Note You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use of your device For more information refer to Setting up SIM Card Lock on page 260 Note If you already have a Google account you only need to sign in Getting Started 20 To create a new Google Account from the Web 1 From a computer launch a Web browser and navigate to www google com 2 On the main page click Sign in gt Create an account for free 3 Follow the on screen prompts to create your free account 4 Look for an email from Google in the email box you provided and respond to the email to confirm and activate your new account Signing into Your Google Account 1 Launch an application that requires a Google account such as Play Store or Gmail 2 Click Existing 3 Tap the Email and Password fields and enter your information 4 Signin Your device communicates with the Google servers to confirm your information 5 If prompted create a new Gmail username by entering a prefix for your gmail com email address 21 Retrieving your Google Account Password A Google account password is required for Google applications If you misplace or forget your Google Account password follow these instructions to retrieve it 1 From your computer use a
228. ls 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Accessibility Note Initially it might be necessary to download accessibility applications from the Play Store 2 Tap TalkBack to access the feature In a single motion touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on E 3 Selectthe The power key ends calls field to activate this feature which uses o to end any current calls 4 Select the Auto rotate screen field to activate this feature which automatically rotates an available screen Changing Your Settings 270 Note Some screens can not be rotated 5 Select the Speak passwords field to activate this feature which reads out password information 6 Tap the Tap and hold delay field to select a time interval for this action Choose from Short Medium or Long 7 Tap the Install Web scripts gt Allow to activate deactivate the feature which allows some applications to install scripts from Google that makes the Web site s content more accessible Motion Settings This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope To activate motion m Press and then tap Settings gt Motion gt Motion activation Note If Motion activation is not enabled all motion services are greyed out and disabled 271 To activate different motion functions 1 Activate and configure any of the following motion feature T
229. mail address and password Tap Create Account if you have not created an account 3 Begin selecting the music you want to listen to Social Hub Allows you to easily and intuitively satisfy all of your communication needs from within a single user interface E mails instant messaging social network contents and calendar contents from all major service providers are available 1 From the Home screen tap E Applications gt Social Hub The Welcome to Social Hub page describes all of the available features 2 Tap Setup now to setup your Social Hub account Applications and Development 198 3 on an account type that you would like to setup Choose from either email accounts SNS accounts or other IM accounts 4 If you choose an SNS account read the SNS disclaimer tap the accept all the terms above checkbox then tap Agree to continue 5 Tap Next 6 Follow the on screen instructions for adding an account 7 From the Social Hub main screen tap the Feeds or Messages tabs to see information pertaining to your account 8 To add another account press 831 5 gt Add account T Mobile Name ID Allows you to modify the on screen Caller ID information Name ID identifies unknown callers by Name City and State 1 From the Home screen tap T Mobile Name 10 2 Choose an on screen option Applications gt 199 T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Vid
230. menu function for the current screen or application For more information refer to Home Screen Menu Settings on page 39 Back Key The Back key 22 returns you to the previously active screen If the on screen keyboard is currently open this key closes the keyboard Understanding Your Device 36 Search Key The Search key displays the Google Search box that can be used to search for a key term online Home Screen The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on your device There are initially seven available panels each populated with default shortcuts or applications You can customize each of these panels Signal strength Battery status Time Connection Status Status Bar Notification area Google search Status Home Screen area Shortcuts Primary Shortcuts 37 Notification area displays those icons associated with end user notifications such as email messages calls missed call in progress new voicemail upcoming event USB connection emails and Text MMS messages These notifications appear at the top left of the screen within the Status bar area and display important user information This information can be accessed by either swiping down from the Status bar page 35 or by accessing the Notifications panel gt Notifications e Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the device such as communication coverage Bluetooth 4G 3G Wi Fi communica
231. mmended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by having the light source behind you 1 From the Home screen tap e Camera to activate the camera mode 2 Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to Camcorder Mode 3 Using the phone s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject 7 Note Zooming is not supported while recording Full HD video Tap the Video key to begin shooting video The red light will blink while recording Tap the Video key again to stop the recording and save the video file to your Camera folder Once the file has been saved tap the image viewer then tap to play your video for review Press to return to the viewer Adjust to a lower resolution to regain this functionality Camcorder Options You can change options using your keypad in capture mode The following short cuts are available Recording mode allows youto setthe recording mode to Normal whichis limited only by available space on the destination location Limit for MMS which is limited by MMS size restrictions and Self recording which activates the front facing camera so you can video yourself Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off or On When you set the flash to On it stays on continually while you are taking a video Settings Edit shortcuts allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most Flash allows you
232. mportant information share quick methods for activating features to define terms and more The definitions for these methods are as follows Notes Presents alternative options for the current feature menu or sub menu Tips Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts Important Points out important information about the current feature that could affect performance Warning Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of data or functionality or even prevent damage to your phone Text Conventions This manual provides condensed information about how to use your phone To make this possible the following text conventions are used to represent often used steps gt Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting successive options in longer or repetitive procedures Example From the Home screen press Menu gt Settings gt Bluetooth Battery Cover The battery SIM card and SD card are installed under the battery cover Important Before removing or replacing the battery cover make sure the device is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the m key until the Device options screen displays then tap Power off To remove the battery cover 1 Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch 2 Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly pop the cover off the device similar to a soda can Release Latch To re
233. n Clock Allows you to set an alarm configure and view the World clock use a stopwatch set a timer or Desk clock The applications display in atabularformat and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger For more information refer to Clock on page 175 Contacts The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory For more information refer to Contacts List on page 101 Downloads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files Internet and Other For more information refer to Downloads on page 176 gt a Email Provides access to both your Outlook Exchange Server based work email and Internet email accounts such as Gmail and Yahoo Mail For more information refer to Email on page 129 Files Lets you view supported image files and text files on both yourinternal storage and microSD card Organize and store data images and more in your own personal file folders Files are stored to either the internal storage or memory card in separate user defined folders For more information refer to Files on page 155 Gallery Displays a Gallery of camera images and video stored in the microSD card For more information refer to The Gallery on page 156 Understanding Your Device 42 Gmail Provides access to your Gmail account Google Mail 43 Gmail is a web based email service
234. n progress Displays when a file or application download is in progress Displays when updates are available for download Displays when a Play Store download has completed Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Displays when Wi Fi Directis active and configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode Displays when either the USB Tethering or Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 225 For more information refer to USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot on page 238 ABO DBEAN A Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active and you are using it with within your current active call Displays when there is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature Displays when your phone is connected to a PC using Kies air Displays when your phone is connected to a Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA certified device using the AllShare application Displays when you are currently in Emergency calling mode You must exit this mode to resume normal calling function Displays in the notifications w
235. n tap E 2 Press and then tap Settings 3 Scroll to the bottom and select Emergency alerts All alerts are enabled by default checkmark showing 4 Taponan alert option to disable the alert and remove the checkmark Messages 128 Text Templates This screen displays your available text message reply templates This is a readily accessible list of both default and user defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages 1 From the Home screen tap E 2 From the Messaging list press and then tap Text templates 3 Tapa message to immediately insert it into your current message conversation To create your own text template 1 From the Home screen tap 2 From the Messaging list press and then tap Text templates 3 Tap Create template 4 Enter a new text string and tap Save 129 Email or Internet Email enables you to review and create email using several email services You can also receive text message alerts when you receive an important email Your phone s Email application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one convenient location There are currently three main types of email accounts on your phone Gmail Internet based email Gmail Yahoo etc and Microsoft Exchange Corporate email or Outlook To send and receive email messages through an ISP Internet Service Provider account or if you wish to use your device to access your co
236. n Internet browser and navigate to http google com accounts 2 Click on the Can t access your account link 3 Follow the on screen password recovery procedure Creating a Samsung Account Just as important as setting up and activating a Google account to help provide access to Maps Latitude Play Store etc An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing applications such as AllShare and Samsung Apps Note The Samsung account application will manage your access to the previously mentioned applications and there is no longer a need to remember different passwords for each application 1 Tap Applications and tap any of the above mentioned applications such as AllShare 2 If you have previously created a Samsung account tap Sign in or If this is your first time tap Create account 3 Tap Terms and conditions to read the legal disclaimers and related information 4 Ifyou agree to the terms place a green check mark in the accept all the terms above field and tap Agree 5 Enter your the required information and tap Sign up 6 Read the on screen messages and tap Next Note You may be prompted to sign in and confirm your credentials via email 7 Verify your account via email by accessing the email address provided during setup and following the steps outlined to complete your registration 8 Without confirming your email address and following the documented procedures related applications wil
237. n and then drag it into its new location Upper left is screen position 1 and bottom right is screen last screen Assigning a New Home Screen 1 Press then tap Edit 2 Drag a desired screen and place it in the center position on the Edit screen Note Any screen occupying the center position is now the new Home screen Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts The device comes with four Primary shortcuts Phone Contacts Messaging and Applications Home As long as the Application menu is displayed in a Customizable grid you can replace these shortcuts with other applications so you access the shortcuts that are most frequently used 1 Press CN and then tap Lu Applications 2 Press ga and then tap View type gt Customizable grid 3 Press and then tap Edit The application pages then appear at the top of the screen the primary shortcuts appear at the bottom and you have the option to also generate a new folder or page to house these application shortcuts 4 Scroll through the application pages at the top and locate the desired application 5 Touch and hold the on screen icon then drag it over one of the four primary shortcuts to replace it The new primary shortcut displays at the bottom of the screen The previous primary shortcuts switches places with your selected icon 6 Press and then tap Save 7 Tap d to return to the Home screen Sharing Application Information The device s Application
238. n display and the keys you can navigate the features of your device and enter characters The following conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation action in the procedures Understanding Your Device 50 Navigating Through the Screens The following terms describe the most common hardware and on screen actions Press and hold Tap Touch and hold 275 F Mobile SAMSUNG a Touch and hold Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available options or to access a pop up menu For example touch and hold from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options 51 e Tap Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the virtual QWERTY keyboard For example tap an Application icon to open the application A light touch works best Touch and hold Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available options or to access a pop up menu For example press and hold from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options Flick Move your finger in lighter quicker strokes than swiping This finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion such as when flicking through contacts or a message list Swipe or slide Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a list For example slide your finger left or right on the Home screen to scroll among the sev
239. n expand this area to provide more detailed information about the current on screen notification icons 1 the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 35 2 Tapa notification entry to open the associated application 2 JSB connected Note The Notifications panel can also be opened on the Home screen by pressing and then tapping Notifications Clearing Notifications 1 Inasingle motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to reveal the Notification screen 2 Tap Clear The notifications are cleared from the panel Accessing Additional Panel Functions In addition to notifications this panel also provides quick and ready access to five device functions These can be quickly activated or deactivated X Silent mode Wi Fi Bluetooth The following functions can either be activated green or deactivated white Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS Silent mode or Screen rotation Function Keys Your phone comes equipped with four main function keys that can be used on any screen Home Menu Back and Search Home Key The Home key e takes you back to your Home screen 44 of the 7 available screens Press and hold to launch the Recent apps Task manager screen For more information refer to Accessing Recently Used Applications on page 56 Menu Key The Menu key amp G activates an available
240. n on cell phone use and human health concerns Health and Safety Information 278 The FDA also is working with voluntary standard setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE the International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy RF from cell phones and at this point we do not know that there is it is probably very small But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head and the cell phone Hands Free Kits Hands free kits may include audio or Bluetooth headsets and various types of body worn accessories such as belt clips and holsters Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones 279 Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is held away from the head in the user s hand or in approved body worn accessories Cell phones marketed in the U S are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body Because ther
241. n that presents eBooks just like the printed version in full color and with all of the features you d want from an eReader For more information refer to Blio eBooks T Mobile on page 173 Understanding Your Device 40 mE iis 41 Calculator Found within the Utility application this launches the on screen calculator application The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions addition subtraction multiplication and division You can also use this as a scientific calculator For more information refer to Calculator on page 174 a Calendar Launches a calendar application that syncs to your Facebook Google or Microsoft Exchange work calendars For more information refer to Calendar on page 227 Camera Launches the built in 8 0 megapixel camera application from where you can take a picture with either the front or rear facing cameras Note A micro SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since there is already 16GB of built in storage Note It is recommended that you store your pictures and videos on a microSD card If something were to occur to the device your files are still protected In addition to taking photos the built in camera also doubles as a camcorder thatalso allows you to record view and send high definition videos For more information referto Using the Camera on page 144 For more information refer to Using the Camcorder on page 151
242. n your Contacts the entry s name is displayed You may also see the caller s phone number if available Call Functions and Contacts List 70 2 Tap Auto reject mode to configure your automatic rejection settings Rejected calls are routed automatically to your voicemail Choose from Off disables the automatic rejection feature You must then Touch and drag manually reject incoming phone calls Touch and slide upward to reject All numbers enables the features for all known and unknown to answer g numbers including those contacts that are not assigned to the the call rejection list Touch and slide to reject e Auto reject numbers automatically rejects all entries assigned the call to the Reject list Blacklist Adding numbers to the rejection list Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu Managing Reject Calls This feature allows you to categorize both known and or via the Auto reject list menu The Contacts menu option unknown callers as rejected contacts These Contacts are assigns all numbers for an individual as rejected The Auto then added to you Rejection list which can be managed for reject list allows to assign individual numbers individual entries from within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Call gt Call rejection or From the Home screen tap iu and then tap Call settings gt Call rejection
243. nce the number has been changed Erasing the Call Log List You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries from the Call log list To clear a single entry from the list 1 From the Home screen tap EA 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Delete gt OK To clear all entries from the list 1 From the Home screen tap R gt ES 2 Press and then tap Delete 3 Tap Select all gt Delete gt OK Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen When you are unable to answer a call for any reason and your screen is locked the number of missed calls are displayed on the Lock screen immediately after a call is missed 1 Press Power to reactivate the screen 2 Touch and drag the button with the number of missed calls on it anywhere on the screen The Call log tab is then displayed Call Functions and Contacts List 86 Section 5 Entering Text This section describes how to select the desired text input method when entering characters into your phone This section also describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering text Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the phone is being held in an upright Portrait or sideways Landscape orientation This is useful when entering text Your phone also provides several on screen keypad text entry options to make the task of text entry that much easie
244. nd receive multimedia messages such as picture video and audio messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s multimedia message service Message Icons on the Status Bar Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display when new messages are received For more information refer to Status Bar on page 30 Important During the creation of a text message adding an image sound file or video clip automatically changes it from a text message SMS to a multimedia message MMS Note The Messaging application can also be accessed by pressing 3 and then tapping Apps gt z Messaging Creating and Sending Messages 1 From the Home screen tap ES Messaging gt DA Compose EE 2 Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a recipient or 3 Tap Fy to select from one of the following e Contacts to select a recipient from your Contacts list valid entries must have a wireless phone number or email address Call log to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages Groups to select a recipient from the Group list Favorites to select a recipient from the Favorites list 4 If adding a recipient from either Call log Contacts or Group tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Done The contact displays in the recipient field Note Delete any unnecessary members by tapping
245. nd Maintenance 290 Charging battery 14 Children and Cell Phones 280 Clearing Application cache and data 196 CMAS 128 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 283 Configuration Initial 17 Connections Accessing the Internet 207 Contact Copying to microSD Card 112 Copying to SIM Card 112 Creating a New 101 Joining 108 New From Keypad 103 Contact Entry Options 108 Contact List Options 106 Contact Menus Options 107 Contacts Adding a Number to Existing 105 Adding Your Facebook Friends 115 Additional Options 116 Deleting 106 Display Options 114 116 Displaying Contacts by Name 116 Export List to microSD 220 268 Filtering 116 First Name First 116 Groups 117 Last Name First 116 Merge with Google 106 Reject List 107 Send Namecard Via 107 Sending All 111 Setting Default Location 107 Settings 116 Sharing Sending 111 Contacts List 66 Context Menus 105 107 Navigation 55 Using 55 Cookies Emptying 212 Copying Contact 112 Corporate Email Account Syncronization 256 Add Account 256 CPU Usage Display 273 Creating a Playlist 167 Creating and sending Messages 120 Custom Power Saving 251 Customizable Grid 58 Customizing Home screens 56 D Data Limit Setting 235 Data Roaming 241 Activate Deactivate 241 Data Usage Cycle 235 Limiting 235 Date Selecting Format 270 Date and Time 270 Default Notifications Settings 248 Default Storage Assigning 143 Camcorder 18 143 153 Camera 18 143 Camera Storage 147 Deletin
246. nd install the SIM card The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your PIN available optional services and many other features If desired you can also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone Understanding this User Manual The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your phone A robust index for features begins on page 328 Also included is important safety information that you should know before using your phone This information is available near the back of the guide beginning on page 276 This manual provides navigation instructions according to the default display settings If you select other settings navigation may be different Unless otherwise specified all instructions in this manual assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the available keys Note Instructions in this manual are based on default settings and may vary from your device depending on the software version on your device and any changes to the device s Settings Unless stated otherwise instructions in this User Manual start with the device unlocked at the Home screen All screen images in this manual are simulated Actual displays may vary depending on the software version of your device and any changes to the device s Settings Getting Started 8 Special Text Throughout this manual you ll find text that is set apart from the rest These are intended to point out i
247. ng an Additional Gmail Account 1 From the Home screen tap LE gt m Gmail 2 If you already have other email account setup Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page Access available accounts and folders Account name Inbox pats gmail com Google team C 6 people you might know on Google 3 Tap Add account and follow the same steps as referenced in the previous section For more information refer to Signing into Google Mail on page 138 Google Talk Google Talk is a free Windows and web based application for instant messaging offered by Google Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts Note Before using this application you must first have an active Gmail account available and be currently logged in 1 From the Home screen tap La gt Talk Note If you are not already logged into Google refer to the instructions for signing in on page 138 2 Begin using Google Talk Messages 140 Note The Network confirms your login and processes This could take up to 5 minutes to complete Using Instant Messaging IM Instant Messaging allows you to send and receive instant messages using Windows Live Messenger Google Talk or Yahoo Messenger communities Signing into Your IM Account Although each account type differ
248. ng attachments to a message To add an attachment to your message tap e Attach and select one of the following options Pictures allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to add it to your message Take picture allows you to temporarily exit the message take a photo with phone s camera and then add it to your message by tapping Save Videos allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list then add it to your message Capture video allows you to temporarily exit the message record a video clip using the phone s camera and then add it to your message by tapping Save Audio allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio list then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of the audio so that it turns green then tapping OK Record audio allows you to temporarily exit the message and record an audio clip using the phone s microphone It is then automatically attached to the message Location allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your location Messages 122 Contacts allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry then add it to your message by tapping Add Memo allows you to select a current Memo then add it by tapping Attach Task allows you to select a current Task then add it by tapping Attach Adding Additional Text You can copy text such as names phone numbers and events from your Contacts Calendar or a Memo 1 While
249. ngs To exit the Kies air application tap Stop on your device then close out the Web browser on your computer Wi Fi About Wi Fi Wi Fi short for wireless fidelity is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local Area Networks WLAN Wi Fi communication requires access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point WAP These WAPs can either be Open unsecured as within most Hot Spots or Secured requiring knowledge of the Router name and password Note After you complete a connection to an active Wi Fi network the Wi Fi Calling feature will automatically be enabled Activating Wi Fi By default your device s Wi Fi feature is turned off deactivated Activating Wi Fi allows your device to discover and connect to compatible in range WAPs Wireless Access Points 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on E A check mark indicates that Wi Fi is active The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same Screen Connecting to a Wi Fi Network 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi The network names and security settings Open network or Secured with WEP of detected Wi Fi networks display in the Wi Fi networks section 2 Tap the network you wish to connect to Note When you select an open network you are automatically connected 3 Enter a wireless pass
250. ngs gt Display For more information refer to Display Settings on page 249 Status Bar The Status Bar shows information about the connection status signal strength battery level and time and displays notifications about incoming messages calls and other actions This list identifies the icons you see on your display screen Indicator Icons This list identifies the symbols you ll see on your device s display and Indicator area Displays your current signal strength The greater the number of bars the stronger the signal Understanding Your Device 30 E wo A Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active You cannot send or receive any calls or access online information Indicates there is no signal available Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone Displays when there is a system error or alert Displays whena callis in progress Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized Displays when a call is on hold Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized Displays when you have missed an incoming call Displays when you device is set to automatically reject calls from your Reject list or all calls Displays whenthe speakerphone ison Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized 10096 Bc Displays when the microphone is muted Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward Displayed in the Status bar
251. ning System AGPS which obtains information from the cellular network to improve GPS performance AGPS uses your wireless service provider s network and therefore Health and Safety Information 288 airtime data charges and or additional charges may apply in accordance with your service plan Contact your wireless service provider for details Your Location Location based information includes information that can be used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit location based information Additionally if you use applications that require location based information e g driving directions such applications transmit location based information The location based information may be shared with third parties including your wireless service provider applications providers Samsung and other third parties providing services Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls When you make an emergency call the cellular network may activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the emergency responders your approximate location AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area Therefore Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your ability and 289 Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder instructs you Navigation Maps directions and other navigation data including data relating to your current lo
252. not be responsible or liable directly or indirectly for any damage or loss caused or alleged to caused by or in connection with use of or reliance on any such third party content products or services available on or through any such application Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that your use of any third party application is governed by such third party application provider s Terms of Use License Agreement Privacy Policy or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide whether knowingly or unknowingly to such third party application provider will be subject to such third party application provider s privacy policy if such a policy exists SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER 10 Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third Party Applications SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY USE TIMELINESS SECURITY VALIDITY ACCURACY OR RELIABILITY OF OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING THE CONTENT OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG IS DOWNLOADED OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED USE OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION IS DONE AT PURCHASER S OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING
253. ns and Development 186 More for Me Provides customized offers discounts and deals right to your phone by providing some brief customer and location information The application uses your current location to bring you the best deals in your area Initial Setup 1 From the Home screen tap Lu Applications gt gi More for Me 2 Readthe on screen information and configure the necessary options such as Gender Age and agreements 3 Tap Continue to complete the setup process Using the More for Me Application 1 From the Home screen tap Lu Applications gt w More for Me 2 Access an available tab for more options e Just for Me displays a listing of current offers available within your current area All Deals Provides you with common categories to choose from such as Food amp Drinks Health amp Beauty Retail amp Service Activities Events Other and All nearby 187 e My Deals displays a list of previously redeemed offers e Settings Provides access to configuration settings such as Get Better Deals Connect with Facebook and Terms amp Conditions Music player This application allows you to play music files that you have stored on your microSD card You can also create playlists m From the Home screen tap Applications gt Music player For more information refer to Music Player on page 166 My T Mobile This option provides you online access to account specific information such
254. nt information as a reference Read the information and terms then press to retum to the Settings menu Note Firmware baseband kernel and build numbers are usually used for updates to the handset or support For additional information please contact your T Mobile service representative Tip To find your device s Divx registration code and information about registering your device to play DivX protected video tap License settings gt DivX VOD Model number displays the device s model number Android version displays the firmware version loaded on this device Baseband version displays the baseband version loaded on this device Kernel version displays the kernel version loaded on this device Build number displays the software build number 275 Section 13 Health and Safety Information This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your phone The terms mobile device or cell phone are used in this section to refer to your phone Read this information before using your mobile device Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals The U S Food and Drug Administration FDA has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency RF exposure from wireless phones The FDA publication includes the following information Do cell phones pose a health hazard Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards Th
255. o SWYPE text input technology Google Video Chat via Google Talk Compatibility with a new ISIM card Wi Fi Calling via the use of an ISIM card Access to thousands of Movies and TV Shows with the Samsung Media Hub HD Video Player 720p Codec MPEG4 H 264 H 263 VC 1 WMV7 8 VP8 MP43 Format 3GP MP4 WMV ASF AVI and DivX DivX Certified to play video up to HD 720p including premium content Kies Air to wirelessly sync your PC with your phone via a Wi Fi connection e AllShare to share your media content across DLNA certified devices 27 Front View The following illustrations show the main elements of your device The following list correlates to the illustrations T Mobile Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while facing the screen and allows you to video conference Note Video recorded in Portrait mode is reversed during playback Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby mode with the phone open or adjust the voice volume during a call When receiving an incoming call Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone microSD Card Slot internal allows you use a microSD card to expand the memory of your phone Menu key displays a list of options available for the current screen From the Home screen it displays Add Wallpaper Search Notifications Edit and Settings options Home key displays the Home screen when presse
256. oads as color coded lines Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the best imagery available most of which is approximately one to three years old Terrain combines a topographical view of the area s terrain with the current map location Transit Lines displays the overlapping transit lines on your map Latitude allows you to see your friend s locations and share your location with them My Maps displays a list of your preferred maps Bicycling displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map Wikipedia displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your map Settings allows you to select the following additional options Cache Settings allows you to set options to pre fetch map tiles when not using Wi Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles Location Settings lets you access and configure the location settings Labs this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren t ready for primetime They may change break or disappear at any time Click on a Lab to enable or disable it Terms Privacy amp Notices displays the Terms and Conditions Privacy Policy o r Legal Notices information Select the desired information from the pop up menu Feedback allows you to provide application feedback About dis
257. ocess is similar to changing your password from time to time 1 Press then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Screen lock 3 Retrace your current pattern on the screen 4 Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 7 from the previous section Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern 1 Press IC gt and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Screen lock 3 Retrace your current pattern on the screen 4 Tap None PIN Lock and Unlock 1 Press Ic and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Screen lock gt PIN 259 3 Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch Continue to confirm the password 4 Confirm the PIN by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order to unlock the phone Password Lock and Unlock 1 Press IC gt and then tap OP Settings gt Location and security 2 Tap Set up screen lock 3 Tap Password 4 Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to confirm the password 5 Confirm the password by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Using a Visible Pattern When the Make pattern visible option is enabled the device displays the on screen lock grid that is used for unlocking Locking Automatically This option allows you to define the amount of time that must pass before the device can automatically lock on its own Vibrate on Screen Tap When enabled you will feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern using a PIN or pas
258. ock Pattern Changing 259 Creating 258 Deleting 259 Screen Rotation 36 Auto Rotate 249 Screen Tap Vibrate 249 Screen Timeout 249 Screen Unlock Face Unlock 258 Swipe 258 Screens Adding and Deleting 57 Customizing 56 Rearranging 57 SD card Communicating With 64 Mounting the 64 Unmounting 65 Search Settings 273 Search Engine 214 Sending a Namecard 111 Set as Contact photo 149 Home Screen Wallpaper 149 Lock Screen Wallpaper 149 Setting an alarm 228 Setting up Voicemail 22 Settings 232 Accessing 232 Browser 212 Contact list 116 Display 30 Enabling the GPS Satellites 257 Enabling Wireless Locations 257 Messaging 126 Mini Diary 186 Setup Initial 17 Severe Alert Disable 128 Share Application Information 58 Shortcuts Adding from Application Screen 59 Adding from Home Screen 60 Deleting from a Screen 60 Managing 59 Primary 38 SIM Card Changing Exisitng PIN 260 Importing and Exporting 116 Insertion 11 Lock 260 Removal 11 SIM Card Lock Setting Up 260 Smart Alarm 229 Smart Practices While Driving 283 Snooze 230 Repeat 229 SNS 114 Social Hub 310 340 Social Network Adding Facebook Contacts 115 Resync 115 Social Networking Adding Contacts From 114 Software Update 274 Song Set as 167 Speakerphone Turning on and off 80 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 281 Speed Dial Changing an entry 75 Making a call 76 Removing an entry 75 Setting up entries 75 Standard Limited Wa
259. ocuses on the face of your subject Once the camera detects the person s smile it takes the picture Beauty adjusts the contrast to smooth facial features Settings continued e Panorama takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and then adding additional images to itself The guide box lets you view the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall within Action shot detects action and creates a panorama of the moving object Cartoon gives your photo a cartoon look Scene mode allows you to set the Scene to help take the best pictures possible Options include None Portrait Landscape Night Sports Party Indoor Beach Snow Sunset Dawn Fall colour Firework Text Candlelight and Backlight Helpful tips are shown for each scene mode at the bottom of the display screen Exposure value allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider Focus mode allows you to set this option to Auto focus Macro or Face detection Use Auto focus for all other focal situations Auto focus automatically focus the image based on the focus area Macro mode allows you to take close up pictures Face detection causes the camera to automatically recognize if there is a face in the shot It then optimizes the focus and exposure the face Timer allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a picture Options include Off 2 sec 5 sec and 10 sec Effects
260. off the Allow Diagnostics feature Dock Settings This menu allows you to assign external speakers when the device is docked 1 Press AO gt and then tap Settings gt Dock 2 Tap Audio output mode This enables the phone to output audio when docked to a compatible device Date and Time This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed 1 Press time 2 Tap Automatic data and time to allow the network set the date and time CN gt and then tap Settings gt Date and Important Deactivate Automatic data and time to manually set the rest of the options 3 Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the time zone information automatically 4 Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the Month Day and Year then tap Set 5 Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons set Hour and Minute Tap PM or AM then tap Set 6 Tap Select time zone then tap a time zone 7 Tap Use 24 hour format If this is not selected the device automatically uses a 12 hour format 8 Tap Select date format and select the date format type Accessibility Settings This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility applications that aid in navigating your Android device such as TalkBack uses synthesized speech to describe the results of actions KickBack provides haptic feedback for actions and SoundBack plays sounds for various actions Also lets you enable use of the power key to end cal
261. oid keyboard and Swype on screen input methods Enabling and Configuring SWYPE If you configure another text input method Samsung keypad you must re enable SWYPE before using the SWYPE keyboard When SWYPE is enabled there can also be normal keyboard functionality 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input 2 Tap Default gt Swype SWYPE Settings To configure Swype settings 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt E adjacent to the Swype field 2 Tap Select Input Method to switch between keyboard types Choose from either Samsung keypad or Swype 3 Tap How to Swype to view an on screen manual for Swype 4 Tap Personal Dictionary to access and manage your personal dictionary 5 Tap Preferences to alter these settings Audio feedback tums on sounds generated by the Swype application Vibrate on keypress activates a vibration sensation as you enter text using the keypad Show tips tums on a flashing indicator for quick help Auto spacing automatically inserts a space between words When you finish a word just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word Entering Text 88 Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence Show complete trace once enabled sets wether or not to display the complete Swype path Word suggestion suggests words as you are typing Speed vs accuracy sets how quickly Swype responds
262. om the Home screen tap ati and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add 2 sec pause This feature adds an automatic two second pause 3 Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be dialed automatically after the second pause Tip You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering multiple 2 sec pauses 4 Tap mic Wait Dialing Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next sequence of numbers 1 From the Home screen tap B and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits 3 Tap EU 4 Once prompted to Send the following tones tap Yes to dial the remaining digits Redialing the Last Number The device stores the numbers of the calls you ve dialed received or missed if the caller is identified To recall any of these numbers 1 From the Home screen tap m 2 the Call log tab to display the list of recent calls 3 Tap the name number and tap Call Functions and Contacts List 74 Speed Dialing Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List you can set up to 8 speed dial entries and then dial them easily whenever you want simply by touching the associated numeric key Note Speed dial loca
263. ome page features applications and includes a list of item applications by category a list of games a link to search and a link to My apps 1 From the Home screen tap tu Applications gt i 75 Play Store 2 Browse through the categories find an application you re interested in and tap the name 3 Read the application descriptions Applications and Development 194 Important If the selected application requires access to data or control of a function on your device the Play Store displays the information the application will access Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application Once you tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this application on the device and the amount of data it uses Use this feature with caution 4 Tap Install gt Accept amp download Note Use caution with applications which request access to any personal data functions or significant amounts of data usage times 5 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to pay for the application 6 Check the progress of the current download by opening the Notifications panel The content download icon appears in the notification area of the status bar 195 7 Onthe main Play Store screen press and then tap My Apps tap an installed application in the list and then tap Open Tip The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set
264. on page 194 PC Connections You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable using various USB connection modes Mass storage is the default connection method Mass storage allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of the phone to store and upload files This option allows your computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network 219 Connecting as a Mass Storage Device You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access the file directory If you insert a memory card in the device you can also access the files directory from the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader Note The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk separate from the internal memory 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt More gt USB utilities Connect storage to PC Note To use any downloaded application that requires a USB connection between your device and your PC you should first set the USB setting to Mass storage 2 Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable to the computer 3 Tap Connect USB storage Both the phone and computer display icons to show that the device is mounted As soon as the connection is established a drive letter is assigned to the phone s storage device A pop up window displays on the PC wh
265. on of the competent courts in the State of New York to resolve any legal matters arising from the Terms Notwithstanding this you agree that Samsung shall still be allowed to apply for injunctive remedies or equivalent type of urgent legal relief in any jurisdiction 317 Miscellaneous The Terms including all documents comprising the Terms constitute the entire agreement between you and Samsung and supersedes any prior agreement between you and Samsung with respect to your use of the Service Your use of any third party content or service accessed via the Service will be governed by the terms and conditions furnished with and applicable to that content or service If any provision of the Terms is held invalid illegal or unenforceable that portion of the Terms shall be construed in a manner consistent with applicable law to reflect as nearly as possible the original intentions of the parties and the remaining portion of the Terms shall remain in full force and effect Samsung s failure to enforce any right or provision of the Terms will not constitute a waiver of such provision or any other provision of the Terms Samsung will not be liable or responsible for any failure to fulfill any of its obligations under the Terms which failure is due to any cause or condition beyond the reasonable control of Samsung If there is any conflict between these Social Hub Terms and Conditions and the Social Hub Privacy Policy the provisions of
266. on screen keyboard SYM Symbol INR 1o enter numbers and symbols from the on screen keyboard changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case Swype Keyboard Overview Recipients a field where you can enter the recipients of the current message You can choose from Recent Contacts or Group Text Input field a field where text number or other characters can be entered CAPS ALT key When in 123ABC mode this key changes the capitalization of the subsequent entered characters When in SYM mode this key can show additional symbol characters Text Input mode There are two available modes 123ABC and SYM 123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common punctuation marks Text mode button indicates SYM SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers Text mode button indicates 123ABC SWYPE settings Touch and hold this button to access the Swype settings screen Entering Text 90 Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE In 123ABC mode you can enter only letters and a few common punctuation marks from the on screen keyboard The text mode key shows MM Recipients Text input field 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard Current 2 Tap to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode Mode showing letters and numbers on the on screen keys F Once in this mode the text input type shows NM Lu wu MD 7 i
267. ons gt Utility gt Voice command For more information refer to Using Voice Command on page 72 Voice Recorder The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt SEE Utility gt JB voice Recorder 2 Tap Record icon to record an audio file 3 Stop to stop recording The file automatically saves to the Voice list 4 From the Recorded files page press and then tap Share and select a method in which to share this audio file Selections are Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct Refer to each specific section depending on the method you selected to send this voice recording Voice Talk Launches your phone s built in voice recognition system that allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the phone Features include Call Text Navigate Play music Memo and Driving mode m From the Home screen tap Applications gt 2 Voice Taw For more information refer to Using Voice Talk on page 73 Web Open the browser to start surfing the Web The browser is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone m From the Home screen tap d Applications we For more information refer to Web on page 207 YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can
268. oogle or Corporate Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically You can create either a MobileLife Contacts Google SIM Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Phone contact Note Before you can save a contact to the Phone Contact settings must be set to Save new contacts to Phone Important The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account types are only visible after creating an email account of those types on your phone 101 e MobileLife Contacts contacts are stored remotely on the MobileLife servers and can later be retrieved even if your phone has been damaged or reset Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail account SIM contacts are stored within the SIM Card Note SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync also known as Work or Outlook contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook Phone contacts are stored locally on the device Note If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters contacts stored on the phone can be lost Add new account lets you create a new account type Choose from MobileLife Contacts Yahoo mail Windows Live Hotmail Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Google Note When storing an entry into your SIM card no
269. or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software unless we provide other terms along with such upgrade To use Software identified as an upgrade you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the upgrade After upgrading you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility 6 SOFTWARE TRANSFER You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied In such event the transfer must include all of the Software including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades this EULA and you may not retain any copies of the Software The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms 7 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the Software including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments Warranty Information 306 8 TERMINATION This EULA is effective until terminated Your rights under this License will terminate automatically wi
270. or other official emergency number then tap EU Emergency numbers vary by location If certain features are in use call blocking for example you may first need to deactivate those features before you can make an emergency call Consult your User Manual and your local cellular service provider When making an emergency call remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident do not cut off the call until given permission to do 80 Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry Precipitation humidity and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits If the mobile device does get wet do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven microwave or dryer because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device Extreme heat or cold Avoid temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 45 C 113 F Health and Safety Information 290 Microwaves Do not try to dry your mo
271. ority of competent jurisdiction to be illegal invalid or unenforceable then that provision will to the extent required be severed from this License and will be ineffective without as far as is possible modifying any other clause or part of this License and this will not affect any other provisions of this License which will remain in full force and effect 10 2 No failure or delay by any party to exercise any right power or remedy will operate as a waiver of it nor will any partial exercise preclude any further exercise of the same or of some other right power or remedy 10 3 The parties to this License do not intend that any of its terms will be enforceable by any person not a party to it 10 4 This License contains all the terms which the parties have agreed in relation to the subject matter of this License and supersedes any prior written or oral agreements representations or understandings between the parties in relation to such subject matter 327 10 5 Licensor reserves the right to revise the terms of this License by updating the License on its web site or by notifying you by post or by e mail You are advised to check the Licensor s website periodically for notices concerning revisions Your continued use of the Software shall be deemed to constitute acceptance of any revised terms 10 6 You will be deemed to have accepted the terms of this License by using the Software on any device Index Numerics 2 Sec Pause Addin
272. orption Rate SAR Certification Information Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency RF energy set by the Federal Communications Commission FCC of the U S Government These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement NCRP and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE In both cases the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry government and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate SAR The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body 281 expressed in units of watts per kilogram W kg The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1 6 watts per kilogram 1 6 W kg The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in measurements SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands Although th
273. ot involve Samsung and are solely between you and the other user s Intellectual Property The Service and related software are protected under international copyright laws and you are hereby notified that copyrights are claimed by Samsung Subject to the Terms Samsung retains all right title and interest in the Service and in all Samsung s products software and other properties provided to you or used by you through the Service Personal Data The Social Hub Privacy Policy and the following additional provisions govern the use of your personal information When you access the Service Samsung may ask for or otherwise Warranty Information 314 collect certain personal information such as your email address along with your user name and password and in certain cases your mobile phone number so that we can communicate with you for example to send notifications of incoming messages When you use the Service certain technical information such as the type and serial number of your mobile device Internet protocol address your mobile network and country codes timezone technical details of your client as well as your transactions with Samsung for example your acceptance of the Terms will be automatically collected by Samsung The purposes for which Samsung may use such data are explained in the Social Hub Privacy Policy Samsung may also participate with your selected service providers in maintaining your contact lists The third party
274. ou can turn on Location and Google search Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of interest at the street level However this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses more battery power Security This menu contains features that allows you to configure the device s security parameters Screen Unlock Pattern Overview To secure data and limit phone access set the phone to require a screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device or every time the phone wakes up from sleep mode when the screen automatically turns off The Screen lock menu allows to choose from a variety of locking features such as None Swipe Face unlock Pattern PIN and Password Using Swipe This feature is the least secure locking method and only requires that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Screen lock gt Swipe Using Face Unlock This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone This feature is less secure than PIN Pattern and Password locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Screen lock gt Face unlock 3 Read the on screen notification and tap Set it up 4 Follow the on screen instructions Setting an Unlock Pattern Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone When you enable the User visible pattern field you will draw an
275. ound to On or Off Storage allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card if inserted Reset allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings to the default values Image viewer allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected picture The last picture you took will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon Camera button takes a photo when pressed in Camera mode Camera Camcorder Mode allows you to take a photo in various modes Once you change the mode the corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the display Slide the button up for Camera or down for Camcorder Storage location Charge Status indicates the current storage location Phone or Card and the charge state of the device Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options After you take a photo or record a video you can access various options Photo options Share allows you to share a picture using AllShare Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Picasa Messaging Photo editor Google Social Hub Email Gmail Kodak or Snapfish Delete allows you to delete the current picture Tap OK to delete or Cancel More provides additional options For more information refer to Camera Image Options on page 149 Video options Share allows you to share a video using AllShare Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Messaging YouTube Email Gmail Kodak or
276. ounts 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Account and sync 2 Sync all Synchronizing a Google Account To add a new Google account 1 Press pa gt and then tap Settings gt Accounts and sync 2 Tap Add account gt Google 3 Tap Next gt Sign in Note If you do not already have a Google account tap Create and follow the on screen prompts to create your new account 4 Tap the Username gmail com and Password fields and enter your information 5 Tap Sign in Your phone then communicates with the Google servers to confirm your information Your existing Gmail account then appears within the Manage accounts area of the screen Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then automatically updated to your device To configure the Google management settings 1 From the Home screen tap kg Applications Settings gt Accounts and sync Tap 4 within the Google account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Tap Sync Now to synchronize those enabled parameters Press to return to the previous screen For more information refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 113 Synchronizing Your Corporate Account By default there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by the device These must be manually added Note Once a corporate email account is created it i
277. ovies that are available for rent or purchase Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the screen Touch a category and movies of that type display TV Shows displays TV shows that are available for purchase Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the screen Touch a category and TV shows of that type display My Media allows you to view all of the media that you have purchased or rented Touch a media entry to view it 5 Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you would like to purchase or rent 6 Tap tap Buy or Rent 7 Choose a payment method and then follow the on screen instructions The media stores to the My Media folder Media Hub Notices Any media item Media Content may be rented or purchased after you create an account in Media Hub Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up to five 5 devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same account You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than once every 90 days You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you d like You will have the ability to re download the Media Content at a later point in time subject to content re download availability and studio permissions You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have acquired through the Service You can use 3G 4G or Wi Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content Un
278. p Add to reject list Remove from reject list allows you to add or remove the current Contacts entry to a list of automatically rejected incoming phone numbers Send namecard via allows you to send the current Contact entry s information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth Email Exchange or Internet Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct Print namecard allows you to print selected information on a compatible Samsung printer Contact Entry Options 1 From the Home screen tap nB Tap an entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen This screen contains Name contact numbers email and linked contact information Press to reveal the context menu specific to this entry Tap an available option 1 Delete Join contact VY Markas default namecard via Add to reject list Contact Overview Scree Joining Contact Information Most people now maintain multiple email accounts social networking logins and other similar account information For example a Facebook account login name might differ from a corporate email account login because they are maintained separately and for different groups of people This device can synchronize with multiple accounts When you synchronize your phone with those accounts each account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list If one of your contacts Amy Smith has a regular email account that you maintain in Gmail but also has a
279. p Save e f desired press eii and select a new memo background color before saving Adjusting Noise Reduction During a call it may be necessary to adjust the noise reduction feature Activating this feature can improve the quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise 1 Press and then tap Noise reduction off to toggle the status and activate the feature 2 Press and then tap Noise reduction on to toggle the status and deactivate the feature 81 Multi Party calls Making a Multi Party Call A multi party call is a network service that allows multiple people to participate in a multi party or conference call For further details about subscribing to this service contact T Mobile customer service Setting up a Multi Party Call 1 From the Home screen tap 3 2 Dial the number for the first participant and tap mim 3 Tap Add call enter the second phone number and tap EU The first caller is placed on hold 4 Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and tap Merge The two calls are now joined into a multi party call and display in the order in which they were called Important A maximum of two callers can be joined to a single multi party line Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session and are held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call You can swap or place each multi party call on hold Having a Private Conversation With One Participant When you have two participants in a
280. paper gallery You can obtain images from either your Pictures folder from any of the available images within the device s Wallpaper gallery or from the animated Live Wallpapers Note Wallpapers supports the following image types JPEG PNG GIF BMP and WBMP Search displays the Google Search box that you can use to search for a key term online Notifications allows you to expand popup notifications area to provide more detailed information about the current on screen notification icons 39 Edit allows you to add or remove extended screens from your device You can have up to six extended screens one Home screen and six Extended screens Settings provides quick access to the device s settings menu The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing cay and then tapping gt Settings Applications The Application menu provides quick access to the most frequently used applications Applications display on each of the four panels on the Applications screens Application Screen Menu Settings When on the Apps screen the following menu options are available 1 Press and then tap La Applications 2 Press and then select from the following options Edit allows you to add a new folder to the Application screen and then drag drop an existing application into it This feature requires the view be set to Customizable view View type allows you to customize the way the Application menu listing is sho
281. peed dialing 1 From the Home screen tap CE 2 Touch and hold a speed dial location numbers 2 9 or 1 if you are dialing voice mail until the number begins to dial 3 If you are not certain of the speed dial location tap ah gt gt Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial number to view the assigned phone number Wi Fi Calling Wi Fi Calling is a free feature for T Mobile customers using this device with the new ISIM card Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes The benefits of Wi Fi Calling include the following Wi Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current in home coverage experience Wi Fi Calling works anywhere there is a Wi Fi signal available Important A new ISIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling Note This feature is active by default If you are in an active Wi Fi call and go out of range of your Wi Fi the call will be dropped Activating Wi Fi 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings 2 Locate Wi Fi and in a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on EJ The slider color indicates the activation status 3 Select a WiFi network from the list of available networks Follow the on screen in
282. place the battery cover W Position the battery cover over the battery compartment and press down until you hear a click SIM Card Overview Important Before removing or replacing the SIM card make sure the device is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the zz key until the Device options screen displays then tap Power off The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your telephone number PIN available optional services and many other features Important The SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by scratching or bending so be careful when handling inserting or removing the card Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small children Some features on your device such as Wi Fi Calling can be unlocked by using a new ISIM IP Multimedia Services Identity Module card To use this new ISIM card call or contact T Mobile customer service for more information Getting Started 10 This card contains the necessary information for identifying and authenticating the user to the IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem If available you can remove the previous SIM and replace it with the new ISIM card Installing and Removing the SIM card To install the SIM card 1 Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket until the card clicks into place 11 2 Make sure that the card s gold contacts face into the device and that the upper left angled corner of the card is positione
283. plays general information about Google maps such as Version Platform Locale Total data sent Total data received Free memory etc Help provides help information Applications and Development 180 Lookout Lookout provides mobile device specific security features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit Lookout Mobile Security provides key security options that are unique to the mobile market Along with the antivirus and anti malware tech there s a lost and stolen phone locator service an application privacy adviser and a backup service 1 From the Home screen tap Lookout 2 Read the on screen descriptions and tap Get started to begin your configuration 3 Read the on screen information about Security and if desired tap the Enable Security field to activate the feature Tap Next 5 Read the on screen information about Backup and if desired tap the Enable Backup field to activate the feature 6 Tap Next Applications gt 181 7 Read the on screen information about the feature that can help locate your missing phone and if desired tap New user to setup a new account or Existing user to log into your account field to activate the feature 8 Tap Start Lookout From the main application the main features are presented as buttons Tap one to reveal a button that will run the feature Maps Google Maps allow you to track your current location view real time traffic issues and
284. pply to any information which is 4 2 1 lawfully obtained free of any duty of confidentiality otherwise than directly or indirectly from Licensor or 4 2 2 already in your possession provided that Licensee can show such possession from written records other than as a result of a breach of this clause 4 or 4 2 3 which you can demonstrate is in the public domain other than as a result of a breach of this clause 4 4 3 To the extent that any information is necessarily disclosed pursuant to a statutory or regulatory obligation or court order such disclosure shall not be a breach of this clause 4 provided you do what you can to prevent any such disclosure 5 WARRANTY AND SUPPORT The Software is provided as is with no representation guarantee or warranty of any kind as to its functionality or that it does not and will not infringe any third party rights including intellectual property rights Licensor has no obligation under this License to provide technical or other support to you 6 LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY 6 1 Licensor does not exclude its liability if any to you 6 1 1 for personal injury or death resulting from Licensor s negligence 6 1 2 for fraud or Warranty Information 324 6 1 3 for any matter for which it would be illegal for Licensor to exclude or to attempt to exclude its liability 6 2 LICENSOR MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND LICENSOR HEREBY EXCLUDES TO THE FULLES
285. r Text Input Methods There are two text input methods available Google voice typing provides a voice to text interface Samsung keypad an on screen QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation Swype default a new way to enter text on touch screens Instead of tapping each key use your finger to trace over each letter of a word The on screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and landscape mode 87 Selecting the Text Input Method The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two locations Settings Menu m Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default and select an input method Text Input field 1 From a screen where you can enter text a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to reveal the Notification screen 2 Tap Select input method and select an available input method vurce rypirig Samsung keypad Default Text Input Method Configure input methods Entering Text Using Swype Swype is the default text input method that allows you to enter a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter lifting your finger between words SWYPE uses error correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the next word SWYPE also includes a touch predictive text system The on screen keyboard options are different between the Andr
286. r more than 5 000 people with brain tumors glioma and meningioma and a similar number of healthy controls Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer In this study most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones For people with the heaviest use of cell phones an average of more than Y hour per day every day for over 10 years the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer However the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data Additional information about Interphone can be found at http www iarc fr en media centre pr 2010 pdfs pr200 E pdf Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety Additional research is being conducted around the world and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users COSMOS The COSMOS study aims to conduct long term health monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300 000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years Additional information about the COSMOS study can be found at http www ukcosmos org index html Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
287. r is a driving aid that uses both audible and visual directions for GPS navigation 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt qetetav GPS 2 If prompted read the GPS Settings notification tap GPS Settings button and follow the on screen prompts to enable the necessary GPS location feature 3 Read the agreement and tap Accept to accept the terms or tap Exit to close the window Wait for the application to load required first time use files 4 If prompted select to either Upgrade to Premium first 30 days or with Annual Plan or use the Use Basic Navigation at no charge 201 5 Use the available on screen functions Utility This application houses some of the most commonly used utility applications such as Calculator Memo Mini diary Task Videos and Voice Recorder 1 From the Home screen tap ta Applications gt zs Utility 2 Tap an available application to begin its use 3 Refer to the particular application s instructions for more information e Calculator For more information refer to Calculator on page 174 Memo For more information refer to Memo on page 184 e Mini diary For more information refer to Mini Diary on page 185 e Task For more information refer to Task on page 199 e Voice command For more information refer to Voice Command on page 203 Voice recorder For more information refer to Voice Recorder on page 204 T Mobile Video
288. r of the first word in each sentence standard English style Voice input activates the Voice input feature This is an experimental feature that uses Google s networked speech recognition application Auto full stop automatically inserts a full stop by tapping the Space bar twice Tutorial launches a brief onscreen tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keypad Entering Text 96 Using XT9 Predictive Text is a predictive text system that has next letter prediction and regional error correction which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards 1 97 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt adjacent to the Samsung keypad field or From within an active text entry screen tap E from the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keypad settings screen Tap the XT9 field A checkmark indicates activation Tap the XT9 advanced settings and configure any of the following advanced options Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to complete the word you have started A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered before a word prediction is made Choose from 2 letters 3 letters 4 letters or 5 letters Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect
289. r other proprietary notices contained on the original 2 RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP Samsung reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treaties Samsung or its suppliers own the title copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software The Software is licensed not sold 3 LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or algorithms of the Software except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation or modify or disable any features of the Software or create derivative works based on the Software You may not rent lease lend sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software 4 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Samsung and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services related to the Software provided to you if any related to the Software Samsung may use this information solely to improve its products or to provide customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you 5 UPGRADES This EULA applies to updates supplements and add on components if any of the Software that Samsung may provide to you
290. r pictures and videos 3 Remove both the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating the process Changing Your Settings 268 Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to the factory default settings 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset gt Factory data reset 2 Read the on screen reset information Note Select Format USB storage to also erase all data on the USB storage 3 Tap Reset device 4 If necessary enter your password and tap Delete all The device resets to the factory default settings automatically and when finished displays the Home Screen Collect Diagnostics This feature only collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting use 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset gt Collect diagnostics 1 Read the on screen System Manager Application information 269 Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device 2 Choose to enable or disable the feature by placing a check mark in the Allow Diagnostics field 3 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen Important Selecting Close only closes the current description scree and does not disable data collection To disable data collection go to Settings gt Backup and reset Collect diagnostics and turn
291. r view of the sky and uses more battery power Opening Maps 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt M Maps 2 Tapthe upper right My location button to find your location on the map with a blinking blue dot 3 Locate the bottom row of the buttons to access additional options Search allows you to search for a place of interest Directions displays navigation directions to a location from a starting point Applications and Development 182 Places provides access to the places menu where you can My Maps displays a list of your preferred maps quickly locate a business or person find out more information Bicycling displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map about a business see coupons public responses and more Wikipedia displays any Wikipedia markers and info on yo page 192 Locate and tap one of the listed places map Restaurants Coffee Bars Attractions ATMs Gas pelts 4 Press and select one of the following options Explore Nearby or Add your own place A list of places within Clear Map allows you to remove all markings and layers from this category displays the map Layers allows you to switch map views Settings allows you to select the following additional options Traffic available only in selected areas Real time traffic Cache Settings allows you to set options to pre fetch map conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each tiles when
292. rd High Speed Packet Access Plus delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network technology Android v 4 0 Ice Cream Sandwich Platform Compatible with Adobe Flash technology Wi Fi 9 Capability USB Tethering capable Bluetooth enabled Full Integration of Google Mobile Services Gmail YouTube Google Maps Google Voice Search NFC functionality Multiple Messaging Options Text Picture Video Messaging and Instant Messaging with Windows Live Messenger Google Talk and Yahoo Messenger Corporate and Personal Email Media streaming integration via Netflix 8 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus multi shot and digital zoom 2 Megapixel Front Facing camera and preloaded application for Video Chat Music Player with multitasking features Over 450 000 Apps available to download from the Google Play Store Pre loaded e reader applications such as Blio Play Books and Zinio Play Music Social Hub to integrate all of your favorite social networking sites Polaris Office for document viewing and editing Assisted GPS TeleNav GPS Navigation and Google Navigation Webkit based browser Understanding Your Device 26 16GB built in memory on board Expandable memory slot supports up to 32GB Mobile HotSpot Capability Lookout Security Security Backup Missing Device capabilities T Mobile TV Slacker Radi
293. re Messages 136 Signature allows you to create an outgoing email signature attached to new email messages sent from your device Default account assigns this account as the default used when sending out new email messages e Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bcc or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails Forward with files Lets you include attachments when forwarding an email Period to sync email to assign the sync range for your incoming and outgoing email messages between your phone and your external exchange server How many days worth of email messages should the phone and server synchronize Choose from 1 day 3 days 1 week 2 weeks or 1 month Empty server trash allows you to delete your email account s trash bin remotely Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule Qut of office settings allows you to both activate deactivate your email s out of office settings and configure both the start end dates and your outgoing message Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync calendar even months 6 months or All calendar e Security options allows you to
294. redictive Text XT9 is a predictive text system that has next letter prediction and regional error correction Note XT9 is only available when ABC mode is selected XT9 advanced settings are available only if the XT9 field has been selected 1 Press Al d and then tap Settings Language and input gt field or From within an active text entry screen tap E from the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keypad settings screen adjacent to the Samsung keypad 2 Set any of the following options Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad configuration Qwerty Keypad default or 3x4 Keypad Input languages sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to the selected language XT9 enables predictive text entry mode This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings XT9 advanced settings configuration of more advanced XT9 features For more information refer to Using XT9 Predictive Text on page 97 Keypad sweeping allows changing between the input modes without having to use the Input Mode key You can sweep the displayed keypad aside in a similar manner to scrolling through the Home screens Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first lette
295. reement for Software IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd for software owned by Samsung Electronics Co Ltd and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials online or electronic documentation Software 305 BY CLICKING THE I ACCEPT BUTTON OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE I ACCEPT AND STILL INSTALL COPY DOWNLOAD ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA YOU MUST CLICK THE DECLINE BUTTON AND DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Samsung grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA You may install use access display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk s or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only provided that the backup copy must include all copyright o
296. reen you are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green phone icon within the Status bar This is the best way to stay on your current call and do something else multi task such as access the Contacts list view a recent email locate a picture etc In Call Notification Ending a Call Briefly tap Eg key to end the call Note To redial a recent number tap atthe end of the call or locate the number from the Logs list tap the entry and tap Call Ending a Call from the Status Bar 1 From an active call you can launch a separate application or return to the Home screen The current Call is kept active in the background 2 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 3 Tap End to end the currently active call 2 Making Emergency Calls If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on the phone the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card Without a SIM card you can only make an emergency call with the phone normal cell phone service is not available Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed 1 Tap Emergency call from the on screen display to make an emergency call 2 Enter 9 1 1 and tap EU Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call fe
297. rned on If a call is received while it is turned off it will not be included in your calling history Each entry contains the phone number if it is available and Contacts entry name if the number is in your Contacts Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device Indicates any received calls that were answered Indicates any received calls that were rejected Indicates a missed call BEHHB Accessing Call log from The Notifications Area 1 Locate from the Notifications area of the Status bar 2 the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 3 Tap the Missed call entry to open the Call log screen Tip From the Home screen press and tap Notifications to open the panel Call Functions and Contacts List 84 Call logs Caller Overview Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options screen Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected entry Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts Edit number before call press 1o edit the selected number before you place your next outbound call Delete press to delete the Contacts entry Send contact information press to send the current Contacts entry information to an external re
298. roSD Card This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the phone s memory onto the SIM card Note These must be contacts stored on the phone External entries Google Exchange etc can not be transferred in this manner 1 From the Home screen tap n 2 From the Contacts List press and then tap Import Export Export to SD card 3 Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries Contacts 112 Synchronizing Contacts Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote accounts to your phone Prior to syncing you must first have an active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact entries and be signed into your account via the phone With syncing any Contacts entries with phone numbers email addresses pictures etc are updated and synced with your phone For more information about syncing existing managed accounts see Accounts and Synchronization on page 255 1 Press gt and then tap Settings Accounts and sync 2 Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish to synchronize 3 Tap within the adjacent account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 4 To synchronize Contacts tap Sync Contacts A green checkmark indicates the feature is enabled 113 Note The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes If after 10 20 minutes your lis
299. rom GSM Alphabet Unicode or Automatic Multimedia message MMS settings Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered Read reports when this option is activated your phone receives a request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient Auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve messages Roaming auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve while roaming 127 Creation mode allows you to select the creation mode Free Restricted or Warning Restricted you can only create and submit messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain Warning the phone will wam you via pop up messages that you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content Domain Free you may add any content to the message Push message settings Push message allows you to receive push messages from the network Service loading allows you to set the type of service loading notification Choose from Always Prompt or Never Notification settings Notifications allows you to see message notifications on your status bar Select ringtone allows you to set the ringtone for your message notifications Emergency alerts settings Emergency alerts allows you to configure emergency alert Settings You can enable disable those alert categories you wish to receiv
300. rporate email through a VPN Virtual Private Network you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol This protocol is frequently used in large networks and commercial settings IMAP4 is the current standard POPS Post Office Protocol This protocol is supported by most ISPs Internet service providers and common among consumer applications POPS is the current standard Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync This protocol is frequently used with a large corporate email server system and provides access to email contact and calendar synchronization Creating an Internet Email Account 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt 2 If you already have other email account setup Open an existing email account press and then tap Settings gt Add new account Account name 9 Inbox Yahoo 0 Loading messages Enter your Email address and Password information Email address your Internet email address Password typically your network access password case sensitive Tap Push notification to activate the feature wherein new email is actively transferred pushed to the device as it arrives Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in the associated field Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually POP3 or IMAP Follow the on screen prompts and enter the information specific to your emai
301. rranty 300 Status Bar 30 Streaming Movies 191 Sub Menus Navigation 55 Switching to a Bluetooth During a call 80 341 SWYPE 123ABC Mode 91 Swype Entering Text 88 Preferences 88 262 Reset Dictionary 89 263 Settings 88 262 System Volume 248 System Manager 18 269 System Power Saving 251 T Task 199 Tethering 238 Active Icon 224 Disconnecting 224 see USB Tethering 224 Text Adjusting Size 213 Double Tap Zoom 213 Minimum Font Size 213 Text Input Methods 87 Text Input Method Selecting 87 Text Templates 129 Create Your Own 129 Text To Speech 267 Text to speech Configuration 267 Third Party Applications 253 Uninstalling 197 Time Management Calendar 227 Time Zone Selecting 270 T Mobile Video Chat 202 Tools Camera 144 TrackPad Configure 267 Transferring Music Files 169 TTS 267 TTY Mode 245 Twitter Video Chat 202 U UL Certified Travel Charger 287 Understanding Your Device 26 Back View 29 Display 30 Features 26 Front View 27 Home 37 Uninstalling Third party applications 197 Unknown Sources 196 Unmounting SD card 65 Usage Battery 252 USB Mass Storage 236 Utilities 219 236 USB Connections As mass storage device 219 USB Debugging 220 272 Disabling 64 USB Settings As mass storage device 219 USB Tethering 224 Activating 224 239 Disconnecting 224 Use Packet Data 241 Using Favorites Adding Favorites 211 Deleting a Favorite 211 Editing Favorites 211 V Vibration Setup 247 Vid
302. rranty Information 322 In addition it is not technologically possible to remove each and every record of the information you have provided to us A copy of your personal information may exist in a non erasable form that will be difficult or impossible for us to locate CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY This Privacy Policy is effective as of May 29 2010 and complies with Samsung s Corporate Privacy Policy We reserve the right to change this Privacy Policy at any time and will post any such changes to this Privacy Policy on the Social Hub website Please refer back to the Social Hub website on a regular basis to obtain the most up to date Privacy Policy Social Hub End User License Agreement 1 SOCIAL HUB This end user license License allows you to use Social Hub Software made available on your mobile device This License is a legally binding agreement between you and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd the Licensor 323 2 LICENSE 2 1 Licensor grants you for the term of this License a limited personal non exclusive non transferable license to use the Software in object code executable only form on a single device for non commercial uses 2 2 All rights not expressly granted to you under this License are reserved to Licensor and you agree not to take or permit any action with respect to the Software that is not expressly authorised under this License For the avoidance of doubt you have no right to use incorporate into ot
303. ry number that you specify Forward when busy forwards all your calls to voicemail when your phone is busy Forward when unanswered automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not answered and otherwise allows you to enter a voicemail number Changing Your Settings 244 Forward when unreachable automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not in service or is turned off TTY Mode ATTY also known as a TDD or Text Telephone is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf hard of hearing or who have speech or language disabilities to communicate by telephone Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phone s headset jack If this cable was not provided with your TTY device contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the connector cable 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt TTY mode 2 Tap Full TTY to activate the feature or TTY mode off to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting HAC Mode This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid Compatibility for this device 245 1 Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt Call 2 Tap the Hearing aids field to activate the feature green check mark or tap it again to deacti
304. s While navigating a website you can bookmark a site to quickly and easily access it at a future time The URLs website addresses of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks page From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and view your History 1 From the webpage tap The Bookmarks page displays Additional pages include History and Saved pages 2 Press to display the following options List Thumbnail view Select Thumbnail view default to view a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed or select List view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed e Create folder Creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks Change order Rearranges the current bookmarks Move to folder Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected folder Delete Erases selected bookmarks Connections 210 3 Tap a bookmark to view the webpage or touch and hold a bookmark for the following options Open Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark Open in new window Opens the webpage in a new window Edit bookmark Allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark For more information refer to Editing Bookmarks on page 211 Add shortcut to Home Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to your phone s Home screen Share link Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging My tag or Wi Fi Copy link URL Allows you to copy the URL addre
305. s automatically added as a managed account Use the following procedure to configure your phone to synchronize with a corporate email account 1 From the Home screen tap Settings gt Accounts and sync Applications Press and sync gt and then tap Settings gt Accounts Locate and tap the corporate email account Tap within the adjacent account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen Place a check mark adjacent to those events you wish to manually sync Tap Sync Now to synchronize those enabled parameters Press to return to the previous screen Changing Your Settings 256 Location Services The Location services allows you to configure the device s location services Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position Using Google Location Services Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Use wireless networks option 1 Press ay gt and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Google location services allows apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location Enabling the GPS Satellites 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite 257 Tip When using Google Maps y
306. s gt mi Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 3 With the image displayed press and then tap Set as gt Contact photo 4 Tapa contact to make a selection 5 Crop the image and tap Save Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper 1 From the Home screen tap Ed Applications r Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 3 With the image displayed press and then tap Set as Multimedia 150 4 Select one of the two options Home screen wallpaper assigns the current image to the home screen background This image is spread across all available screens Lock screen wallpaper assigns the selected image to the background for the lock screen 5 Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a cropped area 6 Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image or Tap Discard to stop without updating the wallpaper image Editing a Photo You can edit your photos using the Photo editor application on your phone For more information refer to Photo Editor on page 154 151 Using the Camcorder In addition to taking photos the camera also doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record view and send high definition videos Note To ensure the Camcorder can record the video use an SDHC memory card Shooting Video Tip When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions it is reco
307. s the initial sign in procedure is common to all supported IM clients Before beginning the sign in procedure you must complete the previous procedures for selecting your default IM Community to which you are subscribed 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Read the Samsung Social Hub Terms and Conditions then tap the accept all the terms above check box and tap Agree to continue 3 To add a new IM account tap Add account 4 Select an IM client of your choice Windows Live Messenger Google Talk or Yahoo Messenger 141 5 Tapthe available fields to enter your information such as Domain Email Address and Password Select any additional fields 6 Tap Done when you are finished entering information 7 Tap Next Next Your account is displayed 8 Follow the on screen instruction to use IM Google Google makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier You can set up Circles of friends visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 20 2 From the Home screen tap Lu gt Q Google Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google Tap Create a new account to create another account 4 Follow the on screen instru
308. s a list of the most recently viewed websites These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web pages 1 From the Home webpage tap History tab 2 Select a visited range category Choose from Today Yesterday or Most visited 3 Tapan entry to display the webpage or Press and then tap Clear history to delete the current History list Using Most Visited The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited and bookmarked websites These entries are used to return to previously unmarked web pages 1 From the Home webpage tap History gt Most visited tab A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of the list 2 Tap any entry to display the selected webpage Browser Settings To configure browser settings 1 From the Home screen tap ta Applications gt amp we 2 Press and then tap Settings 3 Choose an option from the following categories General Set home page Sets the current home page for the Web browser Form auto fill Allows you to fill in Web forms with a single tap Connections 212 Auto fill text Allows you to set the text used for the Web form auto fill feature Privacy and security Clear cache Deletes all currently cached data Tap OK to complete the process Clear history Clears the browser navigation history Tap OK to complete the process Show security warnings Notifies you if
309. s connected and the battery is not installed the handset will power cycle continuously and prevent proper operation Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery can cause the phone to become damaged Important It is recommended you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first time Connect the USB cable to the charging head Locate the Charger Accessory jack 1 Insert the USB cable into the device s Charger Accessory jack 2 Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its charge state and percent of charge Getting Started 14 Warning While the device is charging if the touch screen does not function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device Incorrect 15 Note This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect orientation for connecting the charger If the charger is incorrectly connected damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone s warranty 5 When charging is finished first unplug the charger s power plug from the AC wall outlet then disconnect the charger s connector from the phone Important If your handset has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive for
310. s menu now comes with a feature that allows you to share information about your selected applications with external users 1 Press CN and then tap Lu Applications 2 Press and then tap Share app 3 Place a check mark alongside those applications you wish to share information about and tap Done Note Most shared applications consist of those that have previously been downloaded from the Play Store 4 Selecta sharing method Choose from Bluetooth Email Gmail Google Messaging Social Hub or Wi Fi Direct 5 The recipient will be notified about the receipt of the new information Understanding Your Device 58 Managing Shortcuts Note To move a shortcut from one screen to another you must carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the screen As the shortcut turns light blue you can begin to move it to the adjacent screen If this does not work delete it from its current screen Activate the new screen and then add the selected shortcut To add a shortcut from the Applications screen 1 59 Press to go to the Home screen Select a screen location for your new shortcut by scrolling across your available screens until you reach the desired one Tap Applications to reveal all your current available applications By default applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid Scroll across the screens and locate your desired application Touch and hold
311. s updated if there have been any changes Applications gt Settings allows you to set weather news and refresh settings Weather settings allows you to choose location s and set the metric for temperature displays News settings allows you to choose topics configure settings for fetching articles and images and view the terms of service for news service Refresh settings allows you to choose options for updating content Application version displays the application version number To access the settings 1 Press and then tap Settings 2 Tap an available option Weather settings News settings Refresh settings and Application version Photo Editor This application provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on your phone Along with basic image tuning like brightness contrast and color it also provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture From the Home screen tap Photo editor For more information refer to Photo Editor on page 154 Applications gt Places Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business or person find out more information about the business see coupons public responses and more 1 From the Home screen tap ae Applications gt Places 2 Tap Search and then use the Find places field to manually enter a desired place or c
312. s your incoming server settings Messages 134 12 If prompted read the Remote security administration information and tap OK to accept the service and continue 13 Adjust the various on screen configuration fields and tap Next It may take a few seconds for the next screen to load 14 If prompted read the Activate device administrator screen and tap Activate to complete the email setup process Note This process can take a few minutes If the previous setup screen re appears ignore it and do not alter any fields during this process 15 Identify your new work email account with a unique name Ex Work then tap Done 135 Opening an Exchange Email 1 From the Home screen tap Lu gt Email 2 Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page 3 Select an exchange email account and tap an email message Refreshing Exchange Email 1 From the Home screen tap Lu Email 2 Select an Exchange email account 3 Press and then tap Refresh Composing Exchange Email From the Home screen tap LL gt Email Press and then tap Accounts Select an exchange email account Tap Inbox and tap DA Compose Enter the recipient s email address in the To field If you are sending the email message to several recipients separate the email addresses with a comma You can add as many message recipients as you want OP Oo 6 Press and then tap Add to
313. samsung GALAXY 6 available at 2 Mobile PORTABLE QUAD BAND MOBILE PHONE User Manual Please read this manual before operating your phone and keep it for future reference uu Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property as defined below owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone including but not limited to accessories parts or software relating there to the Phone System is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws state laws and international treaty provisions Intellectual Property includes but is not limited to inventions patentable or unpatentable patents trade secrets copyrights software computer programs and related documentation and other works of authorship You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property Moreover you agree that you will not and will not attempt to modify prepare derivative works of reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers Open Source Software Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License GPL GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL OpenSSL License BSD Licen
314. se and other open source licenses To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses please visit http opensource samsung com Disclaimer of Warranties Exclusion of Liability EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT AS IS AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE THE DESIGN CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW RULE SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING T989_UM_MR3_English_LG7_PS_100112_F4 THERETO NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN ADDITION SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY INCLUDING INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE USING CUSTOM OPERATIN
315. se instructions to connect to the 3G Note WCDMA is only available on the 4G network network UU 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt More gt 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt More gt Mobile networks gt Network Mode Mobile networks gt Network Mode 2 Tap WCDMA only A check mark displays next to this 2 Tap GSM WCDMA Auto mode A check mark displays option to indicate that it is active next to this option to indicate that it is active This is Network Operators the default mode for this phone Using this feature you can view the current network Using the 2G EDGE Network connection You can also scan and select a network operator If you are not using applications that require the 3G network manually or set the network selection to Automatic speed any application that accesses the network or uses a 1 Press 2 and then tap Settings gt More gt browser using the 2G network saves battery life Mobile networks 1 Press cay 3 and then tap Settings gt More gt 2 Tap Network operators The current network connection Mobile networks gt Network Mode displays at the bottom of the list 2 Tap GSM only A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active Changing Your Settings 242 Important You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an available network 3 Tap Search now to manually search for a network 4 Tap Select automatically to automatically select
316. se the phone Dialer Call log or Contacts list to make a call 4 Go to the dialer and make a call Make sure Wi Fi Calling in use appears during the call Call Functions and Contacts List 78 In Call Options Your phone provides a number of features that are available for use during a call Place a call Dials the on hold number Noise Call Reduction duration Re Ends the call Activates or Activates or Deactivates Deactivates speakerphone Mutes or Unmutes Bluetooth the call Headset 79 Adjusting the Call Volume During a call use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone to adjust the earpiece volume Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and the Down volume key to decrease the level or During a call press the Up Volume key on the side of the device From the Home screen you can also adjust the ring volume using these keys Placing a Call on Hold You can place the current call on hold whenever you want If your network supports this service you can also make another call while a call is in progress To place a call on hold 1 Tap Hold to place the current call on hold 2 Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold To make a new call while a call is in progress 1 Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up in Call history 2 Tap Add call to dial the second call 3 Dial the new phone number and tap To switch between the two calls Tap Swap
317. section describes features and functionality associated with making or answering calls and the Contacts list which is used to store contact information Displaying Your Phone Number m Press gt and then tap Settings gt About phone gt Status Your phone number displays in the My phone number field Note The device s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing Ea and then tapping I Applications gt 9 Settings Making a Call You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM card or to the phone s memory These entries are referred to as the Contacts list 1 Press CN and then tap 8 2 Enter the phone number and then tap m If you make a mistake while dialing tap EJ to clear the last digit Touch and hold to clear the entire sequence Note When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings menu the phone automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not answer the call or is already on the phone provided your call is not sent to voice mail Call Functions and Contacts List 66 Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List 1 From the Home screen tap H Contacts 2 Locate a contact from the list 3 Inasingle motion touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the right This action places a call to the recipient Quick Calling Quick Texting 67 Running a Call in the Background If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home sc
318. shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products No agent employee dealer representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or claims whether in advertising presentations or otherwise on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state Warranty Information 302 What is the procedure for resolving disputes ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other person s or entity s Product or claim and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without r
319. sit each third party advertiser s website directly and opt out Warranty Information 320 Other Disclosures We may disclose personal information when we are required or requested to do so by law court order or other government or law enforcement authority or regulatory agency to enforce or apply our rights and agreements or when we believe in good faith that disclosing this information is necessary or advisable including for example to protect the rights property or safety of the Service and Samsung our users or others CHILDREN The Service is not designed for use by children without their parent s supervision We ask that anyone under the age of sixteen 16 not submit any personal information through the Service We do not knowingly collect any personal information from children under the age of eighteen and therefore we do not knowingly distribute such information to third parties SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT The security of your personal information is important to us We maintain physical electronic and procedural safeguards to secure your personal information However there is 321 always some risk in transmitting information electronically The personal information we collect is stored within databases that we control As we deem appropriate we use security measures consistent with industry standards such as firewalls and encryption technology to protect your information However we cannot gu
320. sonal information as described below We may from time to time transfer or merge any personal information collected off line to our online databases or store off line information in an electronic format We may also combine personal information we collect online with information available from other sources including information received from our affiliates marketing companies or advertisers This Privacy Policy covers all such personal information and will remain in full force and effect as long as you are a user of the Service even if your use of or participation in any particular service feature function or promotional activity terminates expires ceases is suspended or deactivated for any reason INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT Personal Information We may request that you supply us with personal information such as your name e mail address mailing address home or work telephone number in the course of you accessing or using the Service such as via registration forms surveys and polls In each such case you will know what categories of information we collect because you will actively provide the information to us You may not be able to Warranty Information 318 fully utilize all of the features or components of the Service if you choose not to provide certain information If you do choose to give us personal information through the Service we will collect and retain that information Non Personal Information When you
321. ss to use in a message Delete bookmark Allows you to delete a bookmark For more information refer to Deleting Bookmarks on page 211 Set as homepage Sets the bookmark to your new homepage Adding Bookmarks 1 From the Home webpage tap gt Add bookmark 2 Use the on screen keypad to enter the name of the bookmark and the URL 211 3 Assign a folder location Home is the default 4 Tap OK The new save page now appears on the Bookmarks page Editing Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to edit 2 Tap Edit bookmark 3 Use the on screen keypad to edit the name of the bookmark or the URL 4 Tap OK or Deleting Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to delete 2 Tap Delete bookmark 3 Atthe confirmation window tap OK Cancel to exit the operation Emptying the Cookies A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during navigation In addition to containing some site specific information a cookie can also contain some personal information such as a username and password which might pose a security risk if not properly managed You can clear these cookies from your phone at any time 1 From active Web page press and then tap Settings gt Privacy and security Clear all cookie data 2 Tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit Using Web History The History list display
322. ssage or Touch and hold a group entry and select Send message 3 Selectthe recipients of the new message indicated by a green checkmark If an entry contains multiple phone numbers each must be selected individually 4 BI 5 Type your message and tap Send The Favorites Tab The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been designated as favorite contacts For more information refer to Call Log Tab on page 83 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Favorites tab Favorites Adding a contact to your favorites list 1 From within the Favorites tab press and select Add to favorites 2 Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts vo wish to assign as favorites 3 Tap Add to complete the process Contacts 118 Section 7 Messages This section describes how to send or receive different types of messages It also explains the features and functionality associated with messaging Types of Messages Your phone provides the following message types Text Messages Multimedia Picture Video and Audio Messages Email and Gmail Messages Google Google Talk Messenger Instant Messages IM The Short Message Service SMS lets you send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s message service 119 The Multimedia Messaging Service MMS lets you send a
323. stead of using an asterisk 1 Press and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Make passwords visible to activate this feature Device Administration Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC This would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen The phone could be deactivated or restricted through administration from a remote location 1 Press and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Device administrators to begin configuring this setting 3 Select an administrator device and follow the prompts Unknown Sources Before you can download a web application you must enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading Developers can use this option to install non Play Store applications 1 Press 261 then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Unknown sources to active this feature Note If you are notified that you can not download a Play Store application because it comes from an Unknown source enabling this option corrects this issue Credential Storage This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates and other credentials Certificates and credentials can be installed to the SD card and password protected 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Trusted credentials to display only trusted CA certificates A check mark displayed next
324. structions to complete connection A Wi Fi Connected Y Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Call Functions and Contacts List 76 Wi Fi Communication Issue Co RE id Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Note To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi Fi calling when outside the United States the Data Roaming feature on your device must be turned off Note With certain rate plans minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Activating Wi Fi Calling 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar e f prompted with an on screen Did you know your phone can make calls over Wi Fi popup tap Learn and follow the remaining on screen instructions Tap Next gt and tap Done 7T Press fay gt and then tap Settings gt More gt Wi Fi Calling The feature is active when there is a green check mark in the field If Missing 911 Address displays in the Status Bar follow these steps to provide 911 an address for emergency situations Log into my t mobile com Click on Your Profile and edit the Customer Information Enter your emergency location information and complete the online registration Press and then tap Settings gt gt Wi Fi Calling Settings Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for
325. such as Google can only be managed or updated remotely online vs via the device These external types will not allow editing or deleting members locally via the phone 117 Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group 1 From the Home screen tap B 3 2 Tap a group entry gt Add group member 3 From the available list of contacts tap the contact s you want to add A check mark displays next to contact entry 4 Tap Add The selected contacts are added to the group Removing an Entry From a Caller Grou From the Home screen tap n 2 EX Tap a group entry Press and then tap Remove member Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group A checkmark displays next to contact entry 5 Tap Remove The contacts are removed from the group a Editing a Caller Group To edit a Group entry there must be at least one member as part of the selected group 1 From the Home screen tap B 3 2 Touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group 3 Make modifications to the Group name or Group ringtone fields For more information refer to Creating a New Caller Group on page 117 4 Tap Save Deleting a Caller Group 1 From the Home screen tap B 3 2 Press and then tap Delete 3 Select either Select all or tap the desired group 4 Tap GF Sending a Message to a Group 1 From the Home screen tap B gt 2 Tapan existing group and press and then tap Send me
326. sult your health care provider For more information see http Awww fcc gov oet rfsafety rf fags html Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical devices consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion Health and Safety Information 294 or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death Users are advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling point service station Users are reminded of the need to observ
327. sword lock Owner Information This option allows you to show user defined information on the Lock screen 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Security Owner information 2 Tap the Show owner info on lock screen checkbox to create a check mark if you want your owner information displayed 3 Enter text that you would like displayed on your Lock Screen 4 Press twice to save the new text and return to the previous screen Encrypt Device When enabled this feature requires a password be used to decrypt the device each time you turn it on Encrypt SD Card When enabled this feature requires a password be used to decrypt the microSD card each time it is connected Setting up SIM Card Lock Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Set up SIM card lock 3 Tap Lock SIM card enter your SIM PIN code then tap OK Note You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN code To change an existing SIM Card PIN Tap Change SIM PIN Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK Re type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK POR gt Changing Your Settings 260 Password Settings When you create a phone password you can also configure the phone to display the password as you type it in
328. sync and select the type of general synchronization settings you want A check mark indicates selection Clock This feature allows you to create an alarm to ring at a specified time track time in other parts of the world use a stopwatch or set a timer m From the Home screen tap Applications gt Clock Setting an Alarm 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Clock 2 Tap Create alarm 3 Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour and minutes then tap AM or PM toggles depending on which was last selected Time Management 228 229 Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times you want this alarm to repeat Selections are Sunday Saturday or Repeat weekly Selected day blocks turn blue when active Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following Melody Vibration Vibration and melody or Briefing Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to decrease or increase the alarm volume A sample of the volume level plays Tap the Alarm tone field and select one of the following Sounds or Go to My files Locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone then tap OK to activate the ringtone Tap the radio button to activate a tone for the Snooze Tap the field to assign a duration time 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes or 30 minutes and Snooze repeat 1 time 2 times 3 times 5 times and 10 times Duration indicates the length of time the alarm wil
329. t the process or application again 4 Tap Show cached processes to view additional cached applications Important Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the application Storage Used This option allows you to view a list on the current tab of current applications as sorted by size 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Applications 2 Tap the All tab to display all available applications 3 Press and then tap Sort by size to change the current list to show items based on the amount of storage they occupy Changing Your Settings 254 Accounts and Synchronization Your phone provides the ability to synchronize data from a variety of different sources or sites These accounts can range from Google a Corporate Microsoft Exchange Email Server and other social sites such as Facebook Twitter and MySpace Corporate and Google accounts provide the ability to synchronize Calendar events and Contacts To activate Accounts and sync 1 Press and then tap Settings gt Account and sync 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Accounts and sync slider to the right to turn it on To deactivate Accounts and sync 1 Press and then tap Settings gt Account and sync 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Accounts and sync slider to the left to turn it off OFF 255 Synchronizing a All Account By default all managed accounts are synchronized You can also manually sync all current acc
330. t has not been updated repeat step 2 3 5 Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact information Note Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and Corporate accounts via the device Display Options The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose which contacts to display You can also choose to display only contacts that have phone numbers Note Once a display filter has been selected only those Contact entries are shown until the All contacts option is re selected 1 From the Home screen tap B 2 Press and then tap Contacts to display Select any of the following to filter according to the selection All contacts allows you to display all available Contacts Customized list allows you to enable which account categories are displayed For example on Google contacts you can filter which Contact categories are shown Friends Family etc MobileLife Contacts lists those Contacts currently found within the MobileLife account Google lists those Contacts currently found within the Google account Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync lists those Contacts currently found within the Exchange account SIM lists those Contacts currently found only on your SIM card Phone lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync When you synchronize applications such as Facebook Twitter MySpace a corporate email account or Google using
331. taken on your phone In addition to basic image tuning such as brightness contrast and color it also provides several picture editing effects For more information refer to Photo Editor on page 154 Places Displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business or person find out more information about the business see coupons public responses and more For more information refer to Places on page 192 Play Books Provides access to read over 3 million ebooks on the go For more information refer to Play Books on page 193 Understanding Your Device 46 47 Play Movies Rent movies on Google Play and watch instantly using the Google Play Movies app For more information refer to Play Movies on page 161 Play Music Google Music Launches the built in Google Music Player that allows you to play music files that you have both downloaded from Google Music and stored on your microSD card For more information refer to Play Music on page 161 Play Store Formerly known as the Android Market it provides access to downloadable applications games music and movies The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone For more information refer to Play Store on page 194 Polaris Office Polaris Office Mobile for
332. te that only the Name and Number are saved To save additional information for a particular contact such as notes email dates etc it is important to save that Contact into your phone s onboard memory 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Tap to create a contact Note You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad and pressing and then tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact Continue with step 3 3 Tap a destination type MobileLife Contacts Google SIM Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Phone depending on where you want to save the new contact information 4 the First name and Last name fields and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad 5 Tapthe image icon and select a photo for this contact Selections are Take photo or Select picture from Gallery 6 Tap the label button to the left of the Phone field and scroll through the list to select a category such as Home default Mobile Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Car Company Main MMS Radio Assistant Other or Custom Note These label entries can change and are dependant on the selected destination type ex the Other and Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type 7 Tapa phone number field and enter a phone number Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number Tap to enter an additional phone number Tap to remove
333. tes and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone and the person you re speaking with Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise so the person you re calling hears only your voice without disturbing background noise Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience so you can hear clearly and don t need to speak louder to overcome surrounding noise The noise suppression technology is built in and already enabled in your new mobile phone So it s ready to provide unsurpassed voice clarity with every call Table of Contents Section 1 Getting Started 8 Understanding this User Manual 8 Battery Cover 9 Batley 13 Extending Your Battery Life 16 PowerSavings 17 Initial Device Configuration 17 Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location ccc cece 18 Switching the Device On or Off 19 Restarting the Device 19 Locking and Unlocking the Device 19 Creating a New Google Account 20 Signing into Your Google Account 21 Retrieving your Google Account Password 21 Creating a Samsung Account 21 Voice Mail 22 Visual Voicemail 23 Task Manager
334. the course of using the Service Material when your access to the Service is terminated Your submission of Material in the course of using the Service does not transfer ownership rights in the Material to Samsung After the Material is removed from the Service by either you or Samsung some traces of the Material may remain and copies of the Material may still reside within the servers used in providing the Service However Samsung does not claim ownership in your Material You represent and warrant that you have obtained any consents permission or licenses that may be required for you to have the legal right to submit any Material Samsung reserves the right to terminate your access to the Service if Samsung determines at its sole discretion that you have repeatedly submitted infringing Materials to the Service Using the Service You agree to Use the Service only for your private non commercial purposes Comply with applicable laws the Terms and good manners Not submit unlawful offensive abusive pornographic harassing libelous or other inappropriate Material Respect the privacy of others Obtain any consents permission or licenses that may be required for you to have the legal right to submit any Material and Not distribute or post spam unreasonably large files chain letters pyramid schemes viruses or any other technologies that may harm the Service or the interest or property of the Service users Unau
335. the features you d want from an eReader 1 From the Home screen tap I lio eBooks T Mobile 2 Read the on screen welcome information and tap Close 3 Tap an available on screen option and follow the prompts Choose from Get Shop Search and Read Applications gt Calculator Using this feature allows you to use your device as a calculator The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions addition subtraction multiplication and division You can also use this as a scientific calculator 1 From the Home screen tap Li Applications gt aan ES Sa Utility gt x Calculator 2 Enter the first number using the numeric keys 3 Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the Plus Minus Multiplication or Division key 4 Enter the next number 5 To view the result tap the equals key 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required Note Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional scientific functions Calendar With the Calendar feature you can consult the calendar by day week or month create events and set an alarm to act as a reminder Google Calendar is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone and your online Google account Important You should previously add an account Facebook Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Google prior to using the Calendar 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt
336. the on screen icon The new shortcut then appears to hover over the current screen While still holding the on screen icon position it on the current screen Once complete release the screen to lock the shortcut into its new position To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen 1 Press ay to go to the Home screen 2 Navigate to a screen with an empty area 3 Touch and hold an empty area of the Screen 4 From the Add to home screen window tap Shortcuts 5 Scroll up or down the list and tap a selection To delete a shortcut 1 Press CN to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold the desired shortcut This unlocks it from its location on the current screen 3 Dragthe shortcut over the Remove tab Hl and release it Adding and Removing Widgets Widgets are self contained applications that can be placed on any screen Unlike shortcuts widgets appear as applications To add a Widget Press CN to go to the Home screen Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Add to home screen window tap Widgets The available widgets appear within a scrollable area across the bottom of the screen Scroll left or right across the bottom of the screen and then tap an available Widget to place it on your current Screen To remove a Widget 1 Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current screen Drag the widget over the Remove tab Tm and release it As you place th
337. their name number in the recipient area and selecting Delete Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter recipient field or E and selecting recipients Tap the Tap to enter message field and use the on screen keypad to enter a message For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 87 Review your message and tap Send If you have more than one recipient the same text message is sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field Note If you exit a message before you send it it will be automatically saved as a draft Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap B Contacts Locate an entry from the Contacts list Locate an entry from the Contacts list In a single motion touch and slide your finger over the number by going to the left This action addresses a new text message to the selected recipient Messages 120 Quick Calling Quick Texting Message Options Options before composing a message 1 From the Home screen tap Messaging 2 Before composing a message press from the main Messaging screen to display additional messaging options 121 Search allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain word or string of words Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then 22 For more information referto Message Search on page 126 Text templates displays your availab
338. these Social Hub Terms and Conditions shall prevail The provisions of the Terms that are intended to or by their nature should survive termination of your use of the Service shall remain valid after any such termination Social Hub Privacy Policy Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Samsung is committed to protecting the online privacy of visitors users and customers to our Social Hub service This privacy policy Privacy Policy forms part of the Terms which govern your use of Social Hub excluding any third party content and services and if applicable the website where you accessed this Privacy Policy collectively the Service The purpose of the Privacy Policy is to inform you about the types of information we gather about you when you access or use the Service how we may use that information and if and how we disclose it to third parties All users of the Service are required to provide true current complete and accurate personal information when prompted and we will reject and delete any entry that we believe in good faith to be incorrect false falsified or fraudulent or inconsistent with or in violation of the Privacy Policy We will provide you with an opportunity to give your consent in relation to your use of the Service Separate from such consent your access or use of the Service will be construed as your acceptance of the Privacy Policy and of our collection use disclosure management and storage of your per
339. thorized use of the Service including any use in contravention of the Terms is prohibited and may result in Criminal prosecution and or civil liability Restrictions You and any third party directed by You must not display copy store modify sell publish or redistribute the Service whether all or any portion of it and such displaying copying storing modification sale publishing and redistribution shall be prohibited unless you have obtained all necessary rights and permissions from Samsung and the owners and right holders of such the Service or relevant part Warranty Information 312 You must not use the Service for any purposes other than those permitted under the Terms Without limiting this restriction you must not use the service for any illegal purposes to make unsolicited offers or advertisements to impersonate or falsely claim affiliation with any person or entity to misrepresent harass defraud or defame others to post obscene or unreasonably offensive material to negatively present the Service nor for any commercial purposes Except as expressly permitted by the Terms and except to the extent that applicable laws prevent Samsung from restraining you from doing so you are not allowed to disassemble reverse engineer tamper with the Service transmit malicious code or collect information of other users through the Service You may not take any action to interrupt the functionality of or tamper with t
340. thout notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA Upon termination of this EULA you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies full or partial of the Software 9 THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS Certain third party applications may be included with or downloaded to this mobile device SAMSUNG makes no representations whatsoever about any of these applications Since SAMSUNG has no control over such applications Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that SAMSUNG is not responsible for the availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for any content advertising products services or other materials on or available from such applications Purchaser expressly acknowledges and agrees that use of third party applications is at Purchaser s sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with Purchaser It is up to Purchaser to take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser selects to use is free of such items as viruses worms Trojan horses and other items of a destructive nature References on this mobile device to any names marks products or services of any third parties are provided solely as a convenience to 307 Purchaser and do not constitute or imply an endorsement sponsorship or recommendation of or affiliation with the third party or its products and services Purchaser agrees that SAMSUNG shall
341. tibility If you have questions about return or exchange policies consult your service provider or phone retailer Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device Your mobile device is not a toy Do not allow children to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others damage the mobile device or make calls that increase your mobile device bill 297 Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard NFPA 58 For a copy of this standard contact the National Fire Protection Association Cautions Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment Only use approved batteries antennas and chargers The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device Although your mobile device is quite sturdy it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken Avoid dropping hitting bendin
342. tification icon down from the System bar and tap the When you play a song the Now playing screen displays song title from the Notifications area You can also There are various options and controls available while a song pause and resume playback and skip to the next or is playing previous song in the panel For more information refer 1 From the Home screen tap to Applications gt to Notification Bar on page 35 T Play Music Tab Options 2 Tapan album or song 3 From the Now playing screen press Menu to display the following options Sound effects Applies selected sound effects Show options View additional playback features such as There are various options available from the various tabs 1 From the Home screen tap La Applications T Play Music 2 Selectone of the following tabs and tap md to access an available option shuffle and repeat RECENT to display the most recently played songs and albums Settings Allows you to view information such as Open source ARTISTS Play Add to playlist or Shop for artist licenses Help and Music version ALBUMS Play Add to playlist More by artist Shop for artist or 4 Tap Add to playlist to add the song to playlist Search or SONGS Play Add to playlist Delete Shop for artist Delete or Tap gt gt Add to playlist to add the song to Search a playlist PLAYLIST Play Rename or Edit 5 Tap the ARTIST name to vi
343. tings gt Wi Fi gt Scan Wi Fi Advanced Settings The Wi Fi settings Advanced menu allows you to set up many of the device s Wi Fi services including Setting the Wi Fi sleep policy Viewing the device s MAC Address Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP To access the Wi Fi Advanced Settings menu 1 Press gt and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi 2 Press gx and then tap Advanced Tethering This option allows you to share your device s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your device and a single computer The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http www samsung com us support downloads To connect using USB Tethering 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt More gt USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your phone When prompted for a USB mode press to exit the menu Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu This places a green check mark next to the entry and activates the feature A Tethering or HotSpot active notification briefly appears on the screen Look for the Tethering active icon 2 in the Status bar area of the screen
344. tion 1 must be reserved for Voicemail use Setting Up Speed Dial Entries Important Speed dial location 1 is reserved for Voicemail No other number can be assigned to this slot 1 From the Home screen tap am 2 Press gl and then tap Speed dial setting The Speed dial screen displays a virtual keypad with the numbers 2 through 9 3 Tap an unassigned number The Contacts screen displays 4 contact and select a number to assign it to the speed dial location The selected contact number image is displayed in the speed dial number box 75 Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order 1 From the Home screen tap 8 2 Press then tap Speed dial setting Important The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and 5 6 another number cannot be assigned to this slot Press and then tap Change order In a single motion touch and drag an entry over another location on the virtual keypad Tap Save to store the new assignment Press fam to return to the previous screen Removing a Speed Dial Entry 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap is Press and then tap Speed dial setting Touch and hold a existing on screen speed dial location and select Remove from the context menu or Press and then tap Remove Tap an entry and select Remove Press to return to the previous screen Making a Call Using Speed Dial You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the Contacts List for s
345. tion battery levels GPS etc Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information about notifications and device status and allows access to application Widgets Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen width to provide more space for adding icons widgets and other customization features There are six available extended screens panels each of which may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets These screens share the use of the three Primary Shortcuts The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a larger circle Up to seven 7 total screens are available Note Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all screens Google search is an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google Tap to access the Voice Search feature where you can verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search Tap Voice Search to launch the Voice Search function from within this Google widget Widgets are self contained on screen applications not shortcuts These can be placed onto any of the available screens Home or extended Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as Camera YouTube Voicemail Contacts Phone Email Play Store etc These function the same as shortcuts on your computer Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens the majority can also be found within the Applications s
346. to Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list or at the end of the list if View type is set to Customizable grid Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details Launching an Installed Google Application 1 From the Home screen tap Applications 2 Tap the newly installed application This application is typically located on the last Applications page Android Development This device can be used for Android application development You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this device then run the applications using the hardware system and network Warning Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company end users operate these devices at their own risk Unknown sources This feature can be used for Android application development The feature allows developers to install non Play Store applications m Press gt and then tap Settings gt Security Unknown sources Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is active Note If Unknown sources is disabled those applications without a certificate will not be allowed to download to your device Manage applications This feature allows you to manage and remove installed applications You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for eac
347. to browse through your new and available music Music albums and artists are grouped into categories 3 an on screen album to open it and begin playback 4 Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the Music application by tapping the Music application icon Music notification icon at the top left of the Application bar Changing Library View You can change the way you view the contents of your library 1 From the Home screen tap LJ Applications gt Qv Play Music 2 While in a selection or screen tap near the top left of the Application bar or the tab name to back up to the main Music App menu 3 Available tabs include RECENT ARTISTS ALBUMS SONGS PLAYLISTS or GENRES Note The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or list view depending on the view Searching for Music in Your Library 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Play Music 2 Press and then tap Search to search through your available songs or Press aJ 3 Type the name of an artist album song or playlist Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box 4 Tapa matching song to play it tap a matching album artist or playlist to view a list of its songs Changing Music Settings 1 From the Home screen tap T Play Music 2 Press and then make a selection Shuffle all Play all songs in a random order Settings Provides access to the Play Music settings
348. to delete the current entry Deleting Contacts Important Once Contacts list entries are deleted they cannot 1 2 be recovered From the Home screen tap B Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select Delete gt OK Contact List Options 1 2 From the Home screen tap Press r The following options display Delete allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts Speed dial setting allows you to set up speed dialing Import Export imports or exports contacts to or from the USB storage location SIM card or SD card you can also send namecards via methods such as Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct Merge with Google allows you to merge all of your current Contact entries with your active Google Gmail account If several of your contacts are from other sources such as Corporate email Internet email Facebook etc this allows you to back them up or copy them to your Gmail account Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit Accounts allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on Windows Live Hotmail Yahoo mail Google Microsol Exchange ActiveSync MobileLife Contacts T Mobile Video Chat or Yahoo This option also allows you to manually synchronize all of your current contacts with their respective accounts Send email allows you to send an email using your Google account Send message allows you to send a text or picture message Contacts 106
349. tos or Music and then tap on the media that you would like to share 2 At the Select device screen any devices that you can share with are displayed 3 Tapon a device to share media Receiving Media via AllShare 1 Tap the Remote device tab at the top of the screen All devices that you can receive media from are displayed 2 Tapa device name Media that you can receive from the other device is listed Tap an item that you want to stream to your phone 3 Press to return to the previous page Multimedia 170 T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand 1 From the Home screen tap to Applications gt BD T Mobile TV The T Mobile Terms and Conditions page displays Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 2 Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions Tap Exit to close the application Note T Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be used During this initial registration process any current Wi Fi connections must be disabled 3 Tap Disable Wi Fi if you currently have an active Wi Fi connection 171 4 Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30 day trial of the service or Tap Continue to keep viewing the free content or Purchase Options to buy the paid features 5 Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing Live TV On Dem
350. trast Allows you to adjust the on screen contrast Note The Contrast feature is disabled until the Inverted rendering function is active Advanced Select search engine Allows you to choose a default search engine for your phone Choose from Google Yahoo or Bing Open in background New pages are launched in a separate page and displayed behind the current one Remove the check mark to disable this function Enable JavaScript Enables javascript for the current Web page Without this feature some pages may not display properly Remove the check mark to disable this function Enable plug ins Allows the download of plug ins such as Adobe Flash Default storage Sets the default storage to Memory card Website settings View advanced settings for individual websites Default zoom Adjusts the zoom feature Set to Far Medium or Close Open pages in overview Displays an overview of recently viewed web pages Auto fit pages Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen as possible Block pop up windows Prevents popup advertisement or windows from appearing on screen Remove the check mark to disable this function Text encoding Adjusts the current text encoding Reset to default Clears all browser data and resets all settings to default Bandwidth Management Preload search results Allows the browser to preload high confidence search results in the background If the de
351. tremely loud noises such as rock concerts that might cause temporary hearing loss Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort If you experience ringing in your ears hear muffled speech or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device discontinue use and consult your doctor You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive Suite 300 Reston VA 20190 Voice 800 222 2336 Email info audiology org Internet http www audiology org Pages default aspx Health and Safety Information 292 National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive MSC 2320 Bethesda MD 20892 2320 Email nidcdinfo nih gov Internet http www nidcd nih gov National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH 395 E Street S W Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington DC 20201 Voice 1 800 35 NIOSH 1 800 356 4674 1 800 CDC INFO 1 800 232 4636 Outside the U S 513 533 8328 293 Email cdcinfo cdc gov Internet http www cdc gow niosh topics noise default html 1 888 232 6348 TTY Operating Environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forb
352. ts and sweepstakes on Social Hub These registration or entry processes may require your submission of personal information such as your first and last name street address city state and zip code e mail address telephone number and date of birth The entry page and or rules for the promotion will provide the specific requirements for the promotion You may also have the opportunity to opt in to special offers from our advertisers in connection with these promotions ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT Any questions you may have regarding this Privacy Policy the accuracy of your personal information or the use of your personal information or any requests that we correct update or remove your information in our databases should be directed via e mail to s dufresne Samsung com or via regular mail to Samsung Telecommunications America LLC 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson TX 75082 Attn Customer Support Department After receiving a request to change your information we will make reasonable efforts to ensure that all of your personal information stored in databases we actively use to operate the Service will be updated corrected changed or deleted as appropriate as soon as reasonably practicable However we reserve the right to retain in our archival files any information we remove from or change in our active databases We may retain such information to resolve disputes troubleshoot problems and enforce our Terms Wa
353. ttach the contact cards to a new outgoing email Exchange or Internet Gmail to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Internet based email Messaging to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text message Wi Fi Direct to transmit the entries to another Wi Fi Direct enabled device Sending a namecard using Bluetooth You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a recipient For more information refer to Creating a Contact on page 101 1 From the Home screen tap B 2 Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Share namecard via gt Bluetooth Important You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature 4 the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient Copying Contact Information Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts list is your phone s built in memory This procedure allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone s memory onto the SIM card 1 From the Home screen tap B 2 From the Contacts List press and then tap Import Export Export to SIM card 3 Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries Select a specific entry by touching an entry A check mark indicates a selection 4 Tap 0K The name and phone number for the selected contact is then copied to the SIM Copying Contact Information to the mic
354. ture allows you both automatically set the phone to use a power saving mode and configure additional power saving options manually all in an effort to conserve battery power 1 Press and then tap Settings gt Power saving Select System power saving to use the device s default power saving parameters Sge Select Custom power saving to create your own custom power saving plan When the power gets low confirm appears at the top of the screen This indicates the power saving mode is active To automatically enable power saving options 1 251 Press cay saving Tap System power saving to enable this feature when the battery level is low gt and then tap Settings gt Power 3 4 Read the on screen power saving notice and tap OK to activate the default battery low level at which the power saving mode is activated It is at this level that the automatic power saving function will kick in Tap OK to store the new battery level To activate custom power saving features 1 3 Press AO gt and then tap Settings gt Power saving Place a check mark on the Custom power saving field to activate the feature Tap Custom power saving settings and alter any of the available fields to activate additional power saving parameters Choose from e Power saving starts at to disable assign the battery level that must first be reached before the custom power saving option kicks in
355. unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the phone s buttons or touch screen When you activate the User tactile feedback field you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts as a backup to the pattern lock If you forget your pattern you can regain access to the device by entering a PIN code Note Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Security Tap Set up screen lock gt Pattern Read the instructions then tap Next Review the on screen animation procedure for drawing a pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern 5 Draw your pattern by touching your first on screen point Then without removing your finger from the screen drag your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green circle 6 When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical horizontal or diagonal direction lift your finger from the screen and tap Continue 7 Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping Confirm The Unlock pattern is set POR Changing Your Settings 258 8 Enter the backup PIN code and tap Continue 9 Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and tap OK Changing the Screen Lock Pattern This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock pattern and update it if necessary This pr
356. upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt YouTube 2 When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing posted videos Applications and Development 204 To configure YouTube Settings About W Press and then tap Settings and configure the Help provides answers to most YouTube questions following parameters Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube General Google Mobile Terms of Service High quality on mobile when enabled allows you to start all YouTube Terms of Service videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile Google Mobile Privacy Policy network YouTube Privacy Policy Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on Open source licensing screen captions Choose from Small Medium Large or Extra App version displays the software version for the current Large YouTube application Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads To watch a high quality video Search m Press and then tap Settings gt General gt High Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube quality on mobile searches from showing up in the YouTube search box SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for videos containing restricted content This option blocks these videos from appearing within your search results Choose from Don t f
357. us to the aircraft s operation Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of cell phone services to the offender or legal action or both While using your device leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods If you feel any discomfort stop using the device immediately Health and Safety Information 298 Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries When you repetitively perform actions such as pressing keys drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers or playing games you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands neck shoulders or other parts of your body When using your device for extended periods hold the device with a relaxed grip press the keys lightly and take frequent breaks If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use stop use and see a physician e f your device has a camera flash or light do not use the flash or light close to the eyes of people or pets 122011 299 Section 14 Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty What is covered and for how long SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA LLC SAMSUNG warrants that SAMSUNG s handsets and accessories
358. use the Service we may also collect non personal information We consider non personal information to be information that by itself cannot be used to identify or contact you personally such as demographic information your age gender income education profession zip code etc Non personal information may also include technical information such as your IP address and other anonymous data involving your use of the Service Non personal information may also include information that you provide us through your use of the Service such as the terms you enter into the search functions of Social Hub mail inbox and instant messenger We reserve the right to use or disclose non personal information in any way we see fit USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT Our Services We use your personal information to provide you with any services that you may request or require to communicate with you and to allow you to participate in online surveys We 319 use aggregated non personal information about our users to understand the demographics of users of the Service such as the percentage of male and female users the geographic distribution of our users the age ranges of our users a combination of these and or other demographics We may also use the personal or non personal information we collect to analyze how Service is being used and to improve the content of the Service and for marketing and promotional efforts E mail Communications
359. vate the feature Off is the default setting Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt Additional settings 2 Tap one of the following options Caller ID chooses whether your number is displayed when someone answers your outgoing call Choose from Network default Hide number or Show number Call barring blocks specific types of calls All outgoing calls International calls etc Call waiting notifies you of an incoming call while you are on another call Auto redial automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to connect or the call is cut off Fixed dialing numbers see description below Fixed Dialing Numbers Fixed Dial Number FDN allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a limited set of phone numbers Enabling FDN 1 2 3 Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card Press CN gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt Additional settings Fixed dialing numbers Tap Enable FDN At the prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock Contact customer service for assistance Changing the PIN2 Code 1 oP On Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Call gt Additional settings Fixed Dialing Numbers Tap Change PIN2 At the prompt enter your old PIN
360. via YouTube Play via allows you to play your selected file via AllShare Rename allows you to rename one or more video files Send to allows you to send the file to a Contacts entry New Email address or New phone number Set default destination allows you to assign a default action to take after taking an image Contacts New Email address or New phone number Details displays video file information Photo Editor The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on your phone Along with basic image tuning like brightness contrast and color it also provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Photo editor 2 Tap Select picture to edit a picture in your Gallery or Tap Capture picture to take a picture with the camera 3 the picture and it is loaded into the Photo editor 4 Use the following Photo editor controls to edit your picture Multimedia 154 on Sag Selection Size allows you to set the size of the selection tool to Small Medium or Large Selection use the selection tool to mark an area for cropping rotating etc Crop allows you to crop cut out an area of a photo Rotate allows you to rotate a photo in all 4 directions You can also mirror image a photo Move use the move feature to move a photo around when you are zoomed in and th
361. vice can accurately guess your in progress search it will preempt you by beginning to load the matching Web page before you complete the search request Load images Allows web page images to load along with the other text components of a loaded website Labs Quick controls allows you to enable on screen quick contro via the use of Swype thumb actions Full screen Allows Web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen as possible S Connections 214 Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices such as headsets and hands free car kits and Bluetooth enabled handhelds computers printers and wireless devices The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on 1 Press CN gt and then tap Settings 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on E The slider color indicates the activation status When active displays in the Status area To turn Bluetooth off 1 Press AO gt and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off mw 215 Bluetooth Status Indicators The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance Displays when Bluetooth is active Displays when Bluetooth is connected paired and
362. view detailed destination directions There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a specific address You can view locations on a vector or aerial map or you can view locations at the street level Important Before using Google Maps you must have an active data 3G 4G or Wi Fi connection The Maps application does not cover every country or city m From the Home screen tap Applications gt M Maps Important For best results it is recommended that you enable all of your location services For more information refer to Location Services on page 257 Enabling a Location source Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable a location source To enable the location source you must enable the wireless network or enable the GPS satellites Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position 1 Press cay gt and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Google location services allows apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location 3 Tap GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite Tip When using Google Maps you can turn on Location and Google search Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of interest at the street level However this also requires a Clea
363. viewing options for a selected video Image viewer options are described in the following section The last video you took will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon Camcorder button shoots or stops video recording when pressed in Camcorder mode Camera Camcorder Mode allows you to take a photo in various modes Once you change the mode the corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the display Slide the button up for Camera mode or down for Camcorder mode Storage location Charge Status indicates the current storage location Phone or Card and the charge state of the device Accessing Videos When you shoot a video the file is saved in the Camera folder You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in the Camera folder 1 From the Home screen tap mi Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video playback or Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to select the video green check mark and display the following video menu context options Applications gt Send via allows you to share a video using Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging Wi Fi Direct Kodak and Snapfish Delete allows you to delete chosen selected pictures Tap the check mark to turn it green next to any file or folder you want to delete then tap Confirm deletions More provides you with the additional options such as Share via allows you to share your file
364. w you to see all the messages exchanged similar to a chat program and displays a contact on the screen Message threads are listed in the order in which they were received with the latest message displayed at the top To reply to a text message Current Recipient My Text 1 From the Home Screen tap While the message is open tap the Type to compose field and then type your reply message Compose your reply Your texts are colored Blue and your caller s replies are Yellow Tap Send to deliver your reply or Reply Bubble Text Message Thread Press and then select one of the available message options page 121 Messages 124 To access message thread options From the main Messaging screen touch and hold the message to display the following options e View contact displays the Contact s Overview page Add to contact begins the process of adding the new number to your Contacts list Delete thread deletes the currently selected message thread To access additional Bubble options Touch and hold the message bubble within an active message conversation to display the following options Delete message deletes the currently selected message bubble from the thread Add to Contacts adds the current caller to your Contacts list Copy message text copies the currently selected message bubble from the thread Lock Unlock message locks or unlocks the currently selected message bubble from being
365. where you can use either the USB tethering or portable HotSpot functionality For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 225 More for Me Provides customized offers discounts and deals right to your phone For more information refer to More for Me on page 187 Music player Launches the built in Music player that allows you to play music files that you have stored on your microSD card You can also create playlists For more information refer to Music Player on page 166 My T Mobile This option provides you online access to account specific information such as your current activity billing information plan services downloads and other information For more information refer to My T Mobile on page 188 Navigation Launches a Web based navigation application Caution Traffic data is not real time and directions may be wrong dangerous prohibited or involve ferries For more information refer to Navigation on page 188 Netflix Netflix is a service offering online streaming service that allows you to watch TV Shows amp Movies directly on your phone For more information refer to Netflix on page 191 News amp Weather Launches a Web based news and weather feed based on your current location For more information refer to News amp Weather on page 191 Photo editor Provides basic editing functions for pictures you have
366. wn For more information refer to Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts on page 58 Share apps allows you to share information about selected applications with external users For more information refer to Sharing Application Information on page 58 3 Press CN to return to the Home screen The following table contains a description of each application available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via the Applications screens If the application is already described in another section of this user manual then a cross reference to that particular section is provided For information on navigating through the Applications icons see Navigating Through the Application Menus on page 54 411 amp More b Provides more than just single tap access to directory assistance and other portals Available categories include 411 Directory Assistance Current Weather and more For more information refer to 477 amp More on page 172 AllShare Allows you to share your on device media content with other external devices using DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance and built in AllShare technology Samsung s AllShare makes staying connected easy For more information refer to AllShare on page 169 Asphalt 6 j The Asphalt6 applications provides access to a built in HD racing video game For more information refer to Asphalt 6 on page 173 Blio eBooks T Mobile This is an eReading applicatio
367. word if necessary 4 Tap Connect Connections 222 Wi Fi Status Indicators The following icons indicate the Wi Fi connection status gt Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Displays when Wi Fi is configured for a Wi Fi Direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode Manually Add a New Network Connection 1 From the Wi Fi network screen tap Add network 2 Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless Access Point 3 Tap the Security field and select a security option This must match the current security setting on your target WAP 4 Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure 5 Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the target WAP 223 Note No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network The WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default settings Deactivating Wi Fi 1 Press and then tap Settings 2 Inasingle motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the left to turn it off OFF Activate and Deactivate Wi Fi from the Notification bar Note Use of wireless data connections such as Wi Fi and Bluetooth can reduce battery life and use times Manually Scan for a Wi Fi Network 1 Press gt and then tap Set
368. y Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations Letthe person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and will suspend the call if necessary Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile In other states the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines penalties or other damages Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver s clear view of the street and traffic Never use wireless data services such as text messaging Web browsing or e mail while operating a vehicle Never watch videos such as a movie or clip or play video games while operating a vehicle For more information go to http www ctia org Battery Use and Safety Important Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries and particularly from the continued use of damaged batteries Health and Safety Information 284 Do not disassemble crush puncture shred or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery Do not put a
369. y Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty Precautions for Transfer and Disposal If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung s Customer Care Center for an Extended File System EFS Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details Important Please provide warranty information proof of purchase to Samsung s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge If the warranty has expired on the device charges may apply Warranty Information 304 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson Texas 75082 Phone 1 800 SAMSUNG Phone 1 888 987 HELP 4357 9012 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC All rights reserved No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval Specifications and availability subject to change without notice 111611 End User License Ag
370. you are using 3 Enter your passcode 23 Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order 1 From the Home screen tap Lu Applications gt Visual Voicemail led 2 Read the on screen information and tap Next 3 Read the on screen information and tap Done A list of the voicemail messages displays Important If this is your first time to ever access Visual Voicemail you may be prompted to enter a new PIN code and tap Next to activate Visual Voicemail Note You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 4 Tap an on screen voicemail message to play it back Task Manager Your device can run applications simultaneously with some applications running in the background Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time and the biggest reason for this are background applications These are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still active but minimized The Task Manager not only lets you see which of these applications are still active in the background but also easily lets you choose which applications are left running and which are closed Note The larger the number of applications running on your phone the larger the energy drain on your battery T
371. you to create a memo 1 From the Home screen tap Applications gt Utility gt 2 Tap Create Note If this is your first memo you are automatically taken to the new memo screen 3 Compose the memo 4 Tap Save For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 87 Memo options 1 While viewing the list of Memos press and select one of the following options Create allows you to create a memo Delete allows you to delete one or more memos Search allows you to search within the current set of memos Send allows you to send one or several of your memos at one time Select a memo and tap send to deliver it via Bluetooth Email Messaging or Wi Fi Sort by allows you to sort by Date or Color SNS log in allows you to log into your Facebook Twitter or Linkedin accounts Sync memo allows you to sync your memos Google Docs or send individual memos PIN lock allows you to set a PIN lock so that a PIN must be entered before reading a memo Touch and hold the memo then select Send and choose the method to send this memo Bluetooth Email Messaging or Wi Fi Direct Applications and Development 184 3 From the memo list touch the upper left edit button and select a color for the memo s background then tap Save Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation
372. you want to rename This opens its contents on an on screen popup window 2 With the folder open touch and hold the grey Folder title bar top of the Folder window until the Rename folder pop up displays 3 Enter a new title for this folder and tap Yes Deleting a folder 1 Touch and hold a desired folder This unlocks it from its location on the current screen 2 Drag the folder over the Remove tab ill and release it Managing Wallpapers Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images user taken Live wallpapers animated backgrounds or Wallpaper gallery default phone wallpapers Note Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery power To change the current wallpaper Press CN to go to the Home screen Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Add to home screen window tap Wallpapers Select a Wallpaper Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Save Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds once done tap Set wallpaper PORN gt Tap Wallpaper gallery scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper Understanding Your Device 62 Section 3 Memory Card Your device lets you use a microSD SD or microSDHC card also referred to as a memory card to expand available memory space This secure digital card enables you to exchange images musi
373. your own personal file folders Files are stored to the memory card in separate user defined folders Files allows you to manage your sounds images videos bluetooth files Android files and other memory card data in one convenient location This application allows you to launch a file if the associated application is already on your phone ex MP4 m From the Home screen tap Applications gt Files Note Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders subfolders etc Note The application lets you view supported image files and text files on both your internal storage and microSD card Applications and Development 176 Opening and Navigating within Files DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location 1 From the Home screen tap BH Applications gt i Files 2 Tapa folder and scroll down or up until you locate your selected file Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory Home tab allows you to back up to the root directory Press and then tap View by to change the way the files are displayed on screen Choose from List List and details or Thumbnail Press for these additional options Share Create folder Delete View as List by and More Move Copy Rename and Settings 3 Once you have located your file tap the file name to launch the associated application
374. zes your exchange calendar entries between your device and the remote exchange server Sync task synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your device and the remote exchange server Press to return to the previous page Using Google Mail Google Mail Gmail is Google s web based email When you first setup the phone Gmail is configured Depending on the synchronization settings Gmail is automatically synchronized with your Gmail account Signing into Google Mail 1 From the Home screen tap to gt WP Gmail Note You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features such as Google Mail and Play Store 2 Tap Next to add a Google account 3 Tap Create if you do not have a Google account or Tap Sign in if you have a Google account The Inbox loads conversations and email Opening Gmail 1 From the Home screen tap Li gt M Gmail 2 Tap an existing email message m Messages 138 Refreshing Google Mail From within the Gmail message list tap 5 Refresh at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen send and receive new emails and synchronize your email with the Gmail account Other Gmail Options 1 From the main Gmail screen tap Q Labels at the bottom of the screen to set up and manage Labels for your Gmail messages From the main Gmail screen tap Search at the bottom of the screen to search through your Gmail messages Composing a Gmail Messa 1 2 3

T-Mobile SGH-T989 Samsung Galaxy S II User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents